JP6698598B2 - Amusement machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, and more particularly, to a gaming machine that displays variable identification information and can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player.

  In such a gaming machine, when performing variable display of identification information, it consists of numerical information as first identification information and decoration information as second identification information. During variable display, only numerical information changes. However, there is a mode in which the decoration information is attached to the numerical information when the fluctuation stops (Patent Document 1). Further, there is a device in which decorative display is attached to the numerical information in the middle of the fluctuation by starting the variable display using the numerical information (Patent Document 2).

JP-A-2007-135800 (FIG. 31) JP-A-2004-173716 (FIGS. 8 and 9)

  However, in the above-mentioned gaming machines of Patent Document 1 and Patent Document 2, since the size of the numerical information as the first identification information when the fluctuation is stopped is uniform, the display mode of the decoration information as the second identification information. Depending on the situation, it may not be possible to display a suitable display.

  The present invention has been conceived in view of such circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably displaying the first identification information and the second identification information.

(A) A gaming machine capable of performing variable display of identification information and controlling in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
Equipped with a variable display means capable of performing variable display of identification information,
The identification information includes first information and second information,
The display pattern of the identification information is provided with a first display pattern that displays the first information without displaying the second information and a second display pattern that displays the first information and the second information. ,
The variable display means performs the variable display by the first display pattern after the identification information starts changing in a predetermined direction, and stops the variable display by the second display pattern,
The display mode is different between the first information when displayed in the first display pattern and the first information when displayed in the second display pattern,
The variable display means,
In the special reach that develops after a lapse of a predetermined time after reaching the reach state, the first information is reduced and displayed, and the first information is reduced and displayed according to the effect sound output during the special reach. Display the information by performing a specific action
When the variable display of the identification information is stopped, the first information is enlarged and then displayed, and then the first information is reduced and displayed,
When the variable display of the identification information is stopped, the second information is displayed so as to appear from the rear of the first information displayed in an enlarged manner,
further,
A motion detecting means capable of detecting a motion by a player,
A predetermined display means for performing a predetermined operation in which the predetermined display performs a predetermined operation, and
When the predetermined display is in the specific mode, a specific effect execution unit capable of executing any one of a plurality of specific effects,
Based on the detection result of the motion detection means, a motion corresponding effect means capable of executing a motion corresponding effect corresponding to the movement of the player,
The predetermined display means may include a first display in which the predetermined display is in the specific mode when a first period has elapsed, or the predetermined display in which the predetermined display is the specific period when a second period longer than the first period has elapsed. It is possible to display a second display that is a mode,
It further comprises an effect control means for controlling the effect such that the ratio of the action corresponding effect being executed is higher in the second period than in the first period.
(1) With a gaming machine (such as a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can perform variable display (variable display, etc.) of identification information (design information, design, etc.) and can be controlled in an advantageous state (big hit gaming state, etc.) that is advantageous to the player. There
A variation display means (effect display device 9, effect control microcomputer 100, etc.) capable of executing variable display of identification information is provided,
The identification information (design information, etc.) includes first information (numerical information, numbers, etc.) and second information (decoration information, characters, etc.),
The display pattern of the identification information includes a first display pattern that displays the first information without displaying the second information (a pattern that displays numbers, etc.) and a first display pattern that displays the first information and the second information. 2 display patterns (patterns for displaying numbers and characters, etc.) are provided,
The variation display means performs variation display according to the first display pattern (e.g., variation display according to numbers) after the identification information starts to fluctuate in a predetermined direction (downward direction), and the second display. The variable display is stopped by the pattern (the variable display is stopped by numbers and characters, etc.),
The display mode is different between the first information when displayed in the first display pattern and the first information when displayed in the second display pattern (as shown in FIG. (The number when displayed with only numbers is displayed larger than the number when displayed with numbers and characters, etc.)
An operation detecting means (push sensor 90124, tilt direction sensor unit 90123, etc.) capable of detecting an operation (operation, etc.) by the player,
Predetermined display means (microcomputer 90100 for effect control) for performing a predetermined operation (timer operation, etc.) to perform a predetermined operation (timer operation, etc.) and a specific mode (timer display is "0" display mode, etc.) With the production symbol variation process of 36, S90922, S90934, etc. of FIG. 43),
When the predetermined display is in the specific mode (when the timer display is “0”, etc.), a plurality of types of specific effects (high-expectation expectation suggestion display or low-expectation expectation suggestion display, etc.) ), it is possible to execute any of the specific effects (FIGS. 38(B) and (C)), a specific effect executing means (effect control microcomputer 90100, effect symbol changing process in FIG. 36, etc.),
Based on the detection result of the motion detection means, a motion correspondence effect means (effect control microcomputer 90100, FIG. 36) capable of executing a motion correspondence effect (operation correspondence effect of FIGS. 38 and 39) corresponding to the movement of the player. Of the production symbol variation of S90927, S90929 of FIG. 43),
The predetermined display means is a first display (first display of FIG. 38B) or the like in which the predetermined display becomes the specific mode when a first period (25 seconds or the like of FIG. 38B) elapses. ), or when the second period (60 seconds in FIG. 38C) longer than the first period has elapsed, the predetermined display is the second display (the third display in FIG. 38C) that is the specific mode. It is possible to
The effect is controlled so that the rate at which the action corresponding effect is executed is higher during the second period than during the first period (as shown in FIGS. 40C to 40E, the timer period). Is longer than the first effect with a shorter timer period, the ratio of executing the operation effect is set higher, the total number of operations is set higher, and the number of operations per unit time is set higher. Etc.) The production control means is further provided.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to preferably display the first identification information and the second identification information. Further, it is possible to reduce the boring of the player in the presentation.

(2) The gaming machine of (1) above,
The variable display means displays the second information (character A to character I and the like shown in FIG. 12) corresponding to the kind of the first information (numbers 1 to 9 and the like shown in FIG. 12) provided in plural kinds. The variable display is stopped by the second display pattern (for example, as shown in FIG. 13, the variable display is stopped by a pattern for displaying characters corresponding to numbers).

  With such a configuration, it is possible to preferably display the first identification information and the second identification information.

(3) The gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above,
When the reach state is reached, the variable display means displays the first information and the second information in a display mode different from the display mode prior to the reach state (as shown in FIG. 15, the reach mode). Characters that move greatly as an action during formation are displayed).

  With such a configuration, it is possible to preferably display the first identification information and the second identification information.

(4) The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above,
The variable display means executes a first change effect when changing from the first display pattern to the second display pattern (executes an effect of changing only numbers from numbers to characters as an action at the time of fluctuation stop). , A second change effect is executed when changing from the second display pattern to the first display pattern (the effect of changing from a number and a character to only a number is executed as a change start action),
The execution mode is different between the first change effect and the second change effect (as shown in FIG. 14, in the variation stop time symbol action executed as the first change effect, the character displays the screen of the effect display device 9). From the depth direction when viewed from the front, the number jumps forward, the number moves downward, the character is displayed larger than the number, and in the variation start pattern action executed as the second change effect, the number and the character Is erased and only numbers that are displayed larger than before change fluctuate downward).

  With such a configuration, it is possible to preferably display the first identification information and the second identification information.

(5) The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4) above,
The variation display means displays identification information indicating that the advantageous state is controlled at the end of the reach effect by the first display pattern, and the confirmation display of the identification information after the end of the reach effect is displayed by the second display. It is displayed by a pattern (as shown in FIG. 15, the symbols are aligned only at the end of SP reach, and a determination operation is performed by numbers and characters at the time of final display after returning to the normal background).

  With such a configuration, it is possible to preferably display the first identification information and the second identification information.

(6) The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5) above,
The variable display means, when stopping the variable display of the identification information, performs a display in which the second information appears in a wider display range than the first information before the stop (as shown in FIG. 13, When the variable display is stopped, the character is displayed so as to appear wider than the display range of the numbers before the stop).

  With such a configuration, it is possible to preferably display the first identification information and the second identification information.

(7) The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (6) above,
The variation display means, when stopping the variation display of the identification information, displays the second information so as to jump out from the rear of the gaming machine to the front (as shown in FIGS. 13 and 14, when the variation is stopped. As a symbol action, the character is displayed so as to jump forward from the depth direction when the screen of the effect display device 9 is viewed from the front).

  With this configuration, it is possible to perform a powerful display using the second identification information.

(8) The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (7) above,
The advantageous state is provided with a first advantageous state having a high degree of advantage (probability variation big hit state etc.) and a second advantageous state having a degree of advantage lower than the first advantageous state (normal big hit state etc.),
The first information corresponding to the first advantageous state (number corresponding to the probability variation big hit) and the first information corresponding to the second advantageous state (number corresponding to the normal big hit) are provided,
The variable display means executes the second display pattern only in the first information corresponding to the first advantageous state (as shown in the modification, only in the numbers corresponding to the probability variation big hit, the numbers and the characters are displayed. And so on).

  With such a configuration, it is possible to give a special impression to the highly advantageous first information.

(9) The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (8) above,
The variable display is started based on the fact that the game medium (game ball or the like) has entered the starting area (the first starting winning opening 13 or the second starting winning opening 14 or the like),
A high-frequency state control capable of controlling a high-frequency state (time-saving state, etc.) in which the game medium is more likely to enter the starting region than a normal state until a predetermined condition (variation of 100 revolutions, etc.) is satisfied after the advantageous state is completed Means (game control microcomputer 560 or the like) is further provided,
In the high-frequency state, the variable display means starts the variable display with the first display pattern and stops the variable display with the first display pattern (in the time saving state, the variable display starts with only the number). Stop changing only with numbers).

  With such a configuration, it is possible to preferably display the first information in the high-frequency state.

(10) The gaming machine according to any one of (3) to (9) above,
It further comprises effect sound output means (production control microcomputer 100, sound output board 70, speaker 27, etc.) for outputting effect sound in accordance with effect,
It may develop into a special reach (SP reach, etc.) after a lapse of a predetermined time after entering the reach state,
In the special reach, the variable display means reduces and displays the first information (displayed as a small symbol, etc.), and the reduced and displayed first information according to the effect sound in the special reach. The information is displayed by performing a predetermined operation (as shown in FIG. 15, as the small symbol action pattern B, the small symbol is violently moved according to the effect sound during SP reach).

  With such a configuration, it is possible to preferably display the first information that is reduced and displayed.

(11) The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (10),
Further, a notice effect executing means (effect control microcomputer 100, etc.) capable of executing a predetermined notice effect (full-screen notice effect, etc.),
The predetermined notice effect is executed so that the display mode of the identification information becomes invisible or difficult at the start of the variable display (see FIG. 18(B2), FIG. 20(B2) or FIG. 22(B2). Such as a blackout effect that makes the decorative pattern invisible),
When the predetermined notice effect is executed, the identification information can be displayed in a variable direction in a predetermined direction after the execution period of the predetermined notice effect has elapsed (FIG. 18(B2), FIG. 20(B2). ) Or after the execution period of the blackout effect shown in FIG. 22(B2) has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 18(D2), (E2), FIG. 20(D), (E) or FIG. A change in the forward direction is started).

  With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the start of movement of the identification information from being difficult to understand, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Further, the modes for carrying out the invention described below include the inventions according to the following (12) to (26). Conventionally, in a gaming machine, a period display such as a timer display as shown in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2008-61767 is performed, and when the period display becomes a predetermined mode (0 seconds), a predetermined period is displayed. It is known that the production is performed. In this gaming machine, the effect when the period display is executed is such that the player simply sees the progress of the effect according to the mode of the period display. Therefore, the longer the period display setting period is, the player However, there was a problem that it was easy to get bored in the production. In view of this point, there is a demand for a gaming machine that can reduce the boredom of the player in producing.

(12) In order to achieve the above object, a gaming machine according to another aspect,
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 901 or the like) that performs a predetermined game,
A motion detecting means (push sensor 90124, tilt direction sensor unit 90123, etc.) capable of detecting a motion (operation etc.) by the player,
Predetermined display means (microcomputer 90100 for effect control) for performing a predetermined operation (timer operation, etc.) to perform a predetermined operation (timer operation, etc.) and a specific mode (timer display is "0" display mode, etc.) With the production symbol variation process of 36, S90922, S90934, etc. of FIG. 43),
When the predetermined display is in the specific mode (when the timer display is “0”, etc.), a plurality of types of specific effects (high-expectation expectation suggestion display or low-expectation expectation suggestion display, etc.) ), it is possible to execute any of the specific effects (FIGS. 38(B) and (C)), a specific effect executing means (effect control microcomputer 90100, effect symbol changing process in FIG. 36, etc.),
Based on the detection result of the motion detection means, a motion correspondence effect means (effect control microcomputer 90100, FIG. 36) capable of executing a motion correspondence effect (operation correspondence effect of FIGS. 38 and 39) corresponding to the movement of the player. Of the production symbol variation of S90927, S90929 of FIG. 43)),
The predetermined display means is a first display (first display of FIG. 38B) or the like in which the predetermined display becomes the specific mode when a first period (25 seconds or the like of FIG. 38B) elapses. ), or when the second period (60 seconds in FIG. 38C) longer than the first period has elapsed, the predetermined display is the second display (the third display in FIG. 38C) that is the specific mode. It is possible to
The effect is controlled so that the rate at which the action corresponding effect is executed is higher during the second period than during the first period (as shown in FIGS. 40C to 40E, the timer period). Is longer than the first effect with a shorter timer period, the ratio of executing the operation effect is set higher, the total number of operations is set higher, and the number of operations per unit time is set higher. Etc.).

  With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the player's boredom in the presentation.

(13) In the gaming machine of (12) above,
The action corresponding effect means can execute a plurality of types of the action corresponding effects (first operation effect to fifth operation effect in FIGS. 38 and 39).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to execute a plurality of types of action-corresponding effects, so that it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(14) In the gaming machine of (12) or (13) above,
The effect control means can execute the action-corresponding effect every predetermined period (time T (10 seconds or the like in FIG. 38) or the like) in the second period (FIG. 38).

  With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce boredom of the player in the second period which is longer than the first period.

(15) In the gaming machine according to any one of (12) to (14) above,
The action corresponding effect means, as the action corresponding effect, a plurality of types of effect (such as expectation% in FIG. 38 and FIG. 39) that suggests the degree of expectation that the player will be in an advantageous state (big hit game state, etc.) Of at least one of the effects that suggest which one of the predetermined effects is to be executed (for example, an effect that is a development destination of a special reach effect) is executed ([ Example of operation effect that suggests whether it is executed]).

  According to such a configuration, a variety of motion-responsive productions are enriched, and the boredom of the player can be further reduced.

(16) In the gaming machine according to any one of (12) to (15) above,
The motion detection means is provided in a plurality of types (a plurality of types such as a push sensor 90124 and a tilt direction sensor unit 90123) in a mode capable of detecting a plurality of types of motions by a player,
In the second period, the effect control unit enables execution of the action-corresponding effect in response to the detection of a different action by the action detecting unit in each predetermined period (as shown in FIGS. 38 and 39, a timer). An operation effect corresponding to a button operation and an operation effect corresponding to a stick operation can be executed depending on the time period).

  According to such a configuration, the action corresponding effect can be executed according to the detection of the action by the different action detecting means, so that the boredom of the player can be further reduced.

(17) In the gaming machine according to any one of (12) to (16),
In the second period, there are times when the predetermined display is performed (timer-presented effect in FIG. 38(C1)) and when the predetermined display is not performed (timer-not-effected in FIG. 38(C2)) (FIG. 40(A). ), (B)),
In the second period, the effect control means performs an effect such that the ratio of the action corresponding effect to be executed is higher when the predetermined display is being performed than when the predetermined display is not being performed. It is possible to control (as in (C) to (E) of FIG. 40), it is possible to select to execute the operation effect only when the timer display effect is produced, and when the timer display effect is performed, the operation is performed more than when the timer display is not performed. Also, the percentage of operation effects is high.)
According to such a configuration, in the two periods, when the predetermined display is performed, the ratio in which the action corresponding effect is executed is higher than when the predetermined display is not performed, so that the player intervenes. It is possible to further reduce the possibility that the player gets bored with the production because the execution rate of the possible production is increased.

(18) In the gaming machine according to any one of (12) to (17),
Special effect execution means capable of executing a special effect (a special effect by the hidden/displayed display of the timer frame 9097 in FIG. 44B) (effect control microcomputer 90100, processing for executing the special effect in S90802 of FIG. 36, etc.) Further equipped with,
The special effect executing means is capable of executing the special effect before executing the predetermined display (FIGS. 44(b) and 44(d), etc.), and also when the predetermined display is not executed (during production). The special effect can be executed (FIGS. 44B, 44C, etc.).

  With such a configuration, it is possible to pay attention to whether or not the period display is executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the process before the period display is executed.

(19) In the gaming machine of (18) above,
The special effect is a suggestion display suggesting that the predetermined display is executed after the execution of the special effect (as shown in FIG. 44B, the timer frame 9097 is displayed in a hidden manner in the first area 9091). This suggests that the timer display 9094 will be executed).

  With such a configuration, it is possible to pay attention to whether or not the period display is executed, and it is possible to further improve the interest of the game in the process before the period display is executed.

(20) In the gaming machine of (18) or (19) above,
The special effect can be executed at a plurality of timings during variable display (as shown in FIG. 47, the special effect can be executed at a plurality of timings such as at the start of fluctuation or before the start of reach).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to pay attention to at which timing the special effect is executed.

(21) In the gaming machine of (20) above,
Depending on the timing of execution of the special effect, the ratio of execution of the predetermined display after execution of the special effect is different (as shown in FIG. 46 and FIG. 47, execution of the first area effect at the time of falling out and at the time of big hit). The selection ratio of the timing is different, and the selection ratio of the timer effect in the first area effect is different depending on whether the timing is off or the big hit).

  With such a configuration, it is possible to further focus on which timing the special effect is executed.

(22) In the gaming machine according to any one of (19) to (21) above,
The specific effect execution unit can execute any of a plurality of types of special effects (as shown in FIG. 47, a white timer frame 9097 is displayed as a timer frame 9097 that is displayed in a hidden manner during the special effect. It is possible to execute any one of a plurality of types of special effects such as a special effect and a special effect that displays a red timer frame 9097).

  With such a configuration, it is possible to give attention to which type of special effect is executed.

(23) In the gaming machine according to any one of (19) to (21) above,
The display mode of the predetermined display has a high degree of expectation that it is controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player as compared with the first predetermined display mode and the first predetermined display mode (white timer numerical value display mode, etc.). Display mode (red timer numerical value display mode etc.),
The display mode of the suggestion display includes a first predetermined display mode (white timer frame hidden/displayed mode, etc.) that can be displayed before execution of the predetermined display in the first predetermined display mode and the second predetermined display mode. And a second suggestion display mode that can be displayed before execution of the predetermined display (a red timer frame showing/hiding display mode, etc.),
The special effect executing means can execute the predetermined display in the first suggestion display mode even before executing the predetermined display in the second predetermined display mode (as shown in FIG. 47, a red timer numerical value). Even before the display is executed, it is possible to execute the white timer frame hidden display.

  According to such a configuration, even if the suggestion display in the first suggestion display mode is executed, the expectation for the advantageous state can be prevented from being lowered.

(24) In the gaming machine according to any one of (18) to (23),
The predetermined display means, during the period from the start of the predetermined display until the predetermined display becomes the specific mode (0 seconds or the like),
After updating the predetermined display, the first pattern (FIG. 45) is set as the specific mode without passing through a stop mode (freezing effect shown in FIGS. 45B and 45C) for stopping the predetermined operation of the predetermined display. 45 (f) to (i) patterns, etc.),
After the predetermined display is updated, the second pattern (FIG. 45) is set as the specific mode after passing through the stop mode (freezing effect shown in FIGS. 45B and 45C) that stops the predetermined operation of the predetermined display. 45 (a) to (e) patterns, etc.) can be executed.

  According to such a configuration, the player can be made to pay attention to the display mode of the period display in the period from the start of the period display to the predetermined period display.

(25) In the gaming machine according to any one of (18) to (24) above,
The specific effect execution means is capable of executing a special pattern for performing the operation of the predetermined display again by the predetermined display means when the predetermined display is in the specific mode (SP as shown in FIG. 47). The position of the third region 9096 can be changed depending on whether or not the reach is executed).

  With such a configuration, the player can be made to pay attention to the effect when the period display is in the predetermined mode.

(26) In the gaming machine according to any one of (18) to (25) above,
The specific effect execution means can change the display mode of the predetermined display depending on whether or not a special effect is being executed during the period from the start of the predetermined display until the predetermined display becomes the specific mode. Yes (as shown in FIG. 47, the position of the third area 9096 can be changed depending on whether or not SP reach is executed).

  According to such a configuration, the interest of the game can be improved by considering the situation of the effect being performed during the period from the start of the period display until the period display becomes the predetermined mode.

It is the front view which saw the pachinko game machine from the front. It is a figure which shows a hit classification table. It is a block diagram showing an example of a circuit configuration in a main board (game control board). It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is an explanatory view showing a big hit determination table and a big hit type determination table. It is a figure which shows the fluctuation pattern table used for determining a fluctuation pattern in a table format. It is the explanation drawing which shows one example of the contents of production control command. It is a flowchart which shows a timer interruption process. It is the flowchart which shows the special design process treatment. It is the flowchart which shows production control main processing. It is the flowchart which shows production control process treatment. It is a figure which shows the relationship between 1st information and 2nd information. It is a figure which shows the aspect of variable display. It is a timing chart of a symbol display pattern at the time of non-reach. It is a timing chart of a symbol display pattern at the time of SP reach big hit. It is the flowchart which shows production design fluctuation start processing. It is a timing chart showing the relationship between the variation of the decorative design and each notice effect. It is the figure which shows the production execution example. It is a timing chart showing the relationship between the variation of the decorative design and each notice effect. It is the figure which shows the production execution example. It is a timing chart showing the relationship between the variation of the decorative design and each notice effect. It is the figure which shows the production execution example. It is the front view which looked at the pachinko game machine in other 1st embodiment from the front. It is a figure which shows a hit classification table. It is a block diagram showing an example of a circuit configuration in a main board (game control board). It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is an explanatory view showing a big hit determination table and a big hit type determination table. It is a figure which shows the fluctuation pattern table used for determining a fluctuation pattern in a table format. It is the explanation drawing which shows one example of the contents of production control command. It is an explanatory view showing a configuration example of a pending storage buffer in the game control microcomputer. It is a flowchart which shows a timer interruption process. It is the flowchart which shows the special design process treatment. It is a flow chart which shows starting opening switch passage processing. It is a flow chart which shows special design normal processing. It is the flowchart which shows production control main processing. It is the flowchart which shows production control process treatment. It is the flowchart which shows production design fluctuation start processing. It is the timing chart which shows the production execution timing of the 1st example of timer production. It is a display screen diagram showing an effect image of the third effect when the timer effect is executed. It is an explanatory view showing a fourth super reach timer effect selection table, a first effect operation effect selection table, a second effect operation effect selection table, and a third effect operation effect selection table. It is the figure which shows the production pattern selection table which selects the production pattern of 3rd production in tabular form. It is the flowchart which shows production setting processing. It is the flowchart which shows the timer production process which is executed when the timer production is done inside production design fluctuation processing (S90802). It is a diagram for explaining the area effect. It is a figure for explaining a timer effect in other 2nd embodiment. It is a figure for explaining a timer effect in other 3rd embodiment. It is a figure for explaining various productions in other 4th embodiment.

  Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings. Although a pachinko gaming machine is shown as an example of a gaming machine, the present invention is not limited to a pachinko gaming machine, and may be a coin gaming machine, another gaming machine such as a slot machine, or the like. Any gaming machine may be used as long as it is a machine.

[First Embodiment]
Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of a pachinko gaming machine 1, which is an example of a gaming machine, will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 as viewed from the front. FIG. 2 is a hit type table.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 is a gaming machine in which a game is played by hitting a game ball as a game medium in the game area 7. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is composed of an outer frame (not shown) formed in a vertically long rectangular shape, and a game frame attached to the inside of the outer frame so as to be openable and closable. In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a frame-shaped glass door frame 2 which is provided in the gaming frame so as to be openable and closable. The game frame is a front frame (not shown) installed to be openable and closable with respect to the outer frame, a mechanism plate (not shown) to which mechanical parts and the like are attached, and various parts attached to them (game described later). (Excluding the board 6). In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a game is played by hitting a game ball as a game medium into the game area.

  On the lower surface of the glass door frame 2, there is a hit ball supply plate (upper plate) 3. Below the hitting ball supply tray 3, there are provided a surplus ball receiving tray 4 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hit ball feeding tray 3, and a hitting ball operation handle (operation knob) 5 for firing the hit ball. A game board 6 is detachably attached to the back surface of the glass door frame 2. The game board 6 is a structure including a plate-shaped body that constitutes the game board 6 and various parts attached to the plate-shaped body. Further, on the front surface of the game board 6, a game area 7 in which the driven game balls can flow down is formed.

  The member forming the surplus ball receiving tray (lower tray) 4 is configured in a stick shape (bar shape) at a predetermined position on the front side (for example, the central portion of the lower tray) on the upper surface of the lower tray body, for example. The stick controller 122 that can be gripped and tilted in a plurality of directions (front, rear, left and right) is attached. It should be noted that the stick controller 122 has a predetermined operating finger (for example, an index finger) when the player holds the operating rod of the stick controller 122 with an operating hand (for example, the left hand), and the like. A trigger button 125 (see FIG. 3) capable of performing an instruction operation is provided, and a trigger sensor 121 (FIG. 3) for detecting a predetermined instruction operation such as push-pull operation with respect to the trigger button 125 is provided inside the operation rod of the stick controller 122. (See) is built in. Further, a tilt direction sensor unit 123 (see FIG. 3) for detecting a tilting operation with respect to the operating rod is provided inside the main body of the lower plate and the like below the stick controller 122. Further, the stick controller 122 includes a vibrator motor 126 (see FIG. 3) for vibrating the stick controller 122.

  In the member forming the hitting ball supply tray (upper tray) 3, the player performs a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation at a predetermined position on the upper surface of the upper tray body (for example, above the stick controller 122). A possible push button 120 is provided. The push button 120 may be configured to be capable of mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically detecting a predetermined instruction operation, such as a pressing operation by the player. A push sensor 124 (see FIG. 3) for detecting an operation action of the player performed on the push button 120 may be provided inside the main body of the upper plate or the like at the installation position of the push button 120. In the configuration example shown in FIG. 1, the attachment positions of the push button 120 and the stick controller 122 have a vertical positional relationship in the central portion of the upper plate and the lower plate. On the other hand, the push button 120 and the stick controller 122 may be attached to either the left or right side of the upper plate and the lower plate while maintaining the vertical positional relationship. Alternatively, the attachment positions of the push button 120 and the stick controller 122 may not have a vertical positional relationship but may have a horizontal positional relationship, for example. As the operating means, a lever switch and other operating means such as a jog dial may be provided.

  In the vicinity of the center of the game area 7, an effect display device 9 is provided as a display means capable of variably displaying (also referred to as variable display) effect symbols as a plurality of types of identification information capable of identifying each. The effect design as the identification information is composed of numerical information (for example, a number) as the first information and decoration information (for example, a character) as the second information. The display mode of the first identification information and the second identification information changes corresponding to the variable display. On the right side of the effect display device 9 in the game area 7, a first special symbol display (first variable display portion) 8a that variably displays the first special symbol as a plurality of types of identification information that can identify each, A second special symbol display (second variation display section) 8b that variably displays the second special symbol as a plurality of types of identification information capable of identifying each is provided.

  Each of the first special symbol display device 8a and the second special symbol display device 8b is composed of a simple and small-sized display device (for example, 7-segment LED) that can variably display numbers and characters. The effect display device 9 is composed of a liquid crystal display device (LCD), and on the display screen, an effect symbol display area for performing variable display of effect symbols in synchronization with the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is provided. Be done. In the effect symbol display area, for example, a symbol display area in which three decorative effect symbols (for effect) of left, middle, and right are variably displayed is formed.

  Hereinafter, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a special symbol, and the first special symbol indicator 8a and the second special symbol indicator 8b are collectively referred to as a special symbol indicator (variable display section). There is something to do.

  In addition, in this embodiment, although the case where two special symbol display devices 8a and 8b are provided is shown, the gaming machine may be provided with only one special symbol display device.

  Each of the first special symbol display device 8a and the second special symbol display device 8b is controlled by the game control microcomputer mounted on the main board (game control board). The effect display device 9 is controlled by the effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board. When the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed on the first special symbol display device 8a, the effect display is executed on the effect display device 9 in accordance with the variable display, and on the second special symbol display device 8b. When the variable display of the 2 special symbols is being executed, the effect display is executed on the effect display device 9 along with the variable display, so that it is possible to easily grasp the progress of the game.

  More specifically, the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is such that the first starting condition or the second starting condition that is the execution condition of the variable display is satisfied (for example, the game ball is the first starting winning opening 13). Or after having passed through the second starting winning opening 14 (including winning), the start condition of the variable display (for example, when the number of pending storage is not 0, the variation of the first special symbol and the second special symbol) Display is not being executed, and started based on the fact that the jackpot game is not being executed), and when the variable display time (variable time) has elapsed, the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. To do. It should be noted that passing a game ball means that the game ball has passed through a predetermined winning area, such as a winning opening or a gate, and includes a concept that the gaming ball has entered (winning) the winning opening. Is. Derivative display of the display result means that the symbol (an example of identification information) is finally stopped and displayed.

  When the big hit display result (big hit design) as the specific display result is displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, or the big hit display result (big hit symbol) is displayed as the specific display result on the second special symbol display 8b. When the derivation display is performed, the jackpot display result (combination of the jackpot symbols) as the specific display result is also derivatized and displayed on the effect display device 9. In this way, when the specific display result is displayed as the display result of the variable display, it is controlled to a specific game state (big hit game state) as an advantageous state in which a value advantageous to the player (advantageous value) is given.

  Further, in the effect display device 9, the symbols other than the symbol which is the final stop symbol (for example, the middle symbol in the left and right middle symbols) are continued for a predetermined time, and the big hit symbols (for example, the symbols in the left, middle, and right are arranged in the same symbol). The combination of symbols) is stopped, oscillating, enlarged or reduced, or deformed in a state of being in agreement with each other, or a plurality of symbols are displayed in a variable manner in synchronization with each other, or the positions of the displayed symbols are exchanged. The production performed in a state in which the possibility of a big hit continues before the final result is displayed (hereinafter, these states are referred to as reach states) is called reach production.

  Here, in the reach state, when the effect symbols stopped and displayed in the display area of the effect display device 9 form a part of the big hit combination, the variable display of the effect symbols that are not yet stopped and displayed continues. It is a display state or a display state in which all or part of the effect symbols are variably displayed in synchronization while forming all or part of the big hit combination. In other words, the reach means a state in which the identification information constitutes the specific display result in the plurality of variable display areas, but at least a part of the variable display areas is in the variable display. In this embodiment, the reach state is formed, for example, in a state where the same symbol is stopped in the left and right symbol display areas and the symbol is not stopped in the middle symbol display area. The symbols stopped in the left and right symbol display areas when the reach state is formed are called reach formation symbols or reach symbols.

  The display effect in the reach state is the reach effect display (reach effect). In addition, at the time of reach, an effect different from usual may be performed by a lamp or a sound. This production is called reach production. In addition, at the time of reach, a character (a display effect imitating a person or the like and different from a design (effect design or the like)) is displayed, or a display mode of a background image of the effect display device 9 (for example, color or the like). ) May be changed. The display of the character and the change of the display mode of the background are referred to as reach effect display. In addition, some of the reach are set so that a big hit is more likely to occur when it appears than in a normal reach. Such a special reach is called super reach.

  Below the effect display device 9, a winning device having a first starting winning opening 13 is provided. The game ball that has won the first starting winning opening 13 is guided to the back surface of the game board 6 and detected by the first starting opening switch 13a.

  Further, below the winning device having the first starting winning opening (first starting opening) 13, there is provided a variable winning ball device 15 having a second starting winning opening 14 in which game balls can be won. The game ball that has won the second start winning opening (second starting opening) 14 is guided to the back surface of the game board 6 and detected by the second starting opening switch 14a. The variable winning ball device 15 is opened by the solenoid 16. When the variable winning ball device 15 is opened, it becomes possible for the game balls to win the second starting winning port 14 (the starting winning is easy), which is advantageous for the player. In the state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state, the game balls are easier to win in the second starting winning port 14 than in the first starting winning port 13. In addition, in the state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the closed state, the game ball does not win the second starting winning port 14. Therefore, in the state in which the variable winning ball device 15 is in the closed state, the game balls are easier to win in the first starting winning opening 13 than in the second starting winning opening 14. In addition, in the state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the closed state, although it is difficult to win the prize, it may be possible to win the prize (that is, the game ball is hard to win). Hereinafter, the first start winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14 may be collectively referred to as a starting winning opening or a starting opening.

  Above the second special symbol display 8b, the second special symbol reservation storage display 18b consisting of four displays for displaying the number of effective winning balls that have entered the second starting winning opening 14, that is, the second storage storage number. It is provided. The second special symbol hold storage indicator 18b increases the number of indicators to be turned on by 1 each time there is an effective start winning. Then, each time the variable display on the second special symbol display device 8b is started, the number of lighted display devices is reduced by one.

  Further, above the second special symbol hold storage display 18b, the number of valid winning balls that have entered the first starting winning opening 13, that is, the first holding storage number (holding storage is also referred to as starting memory or starting winning storage. ) Is provided with a first special symbol reservation storage display 18a consisting of four displays. The 1st special symbol reservation storage indicator 18a increases the number of the indicator which lights up whenever there is an effective starting winning a prize. Then, each time the variable display on the first special symbol display device 8a is started, the number of lighted display devices is reduced by one.

  The game machine drives a drive motor in response to the player operating the ball operation handle 5, and uses a rotational force of the drive motor to shoot a game ball into the game area 7 (not shown). ) Is provided. The game ball shot from the hitting ball launching device enters the game area 7 through a ball hitting rail formed in a circular shape so as to surround the game area 7, and then descends from the game area 7. When the game ball enters the first starting winning opening 13 and is detected by the first starting opening switch 13a, if the variable display of the first special symbol can be started (for example, the variable display of the special symbol ends, the first That 1 start condition is established), the first special symbol display 8a starts the variable display (variation) of the first special symbol, and the effect display device 9 starts the variable display of the effect symbol. That is, the variable display of the first special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to the winning in the first starting winning opening 13. Unless the variable display of the first special symbol can be started, the first reserved storage number is increased by 1 on condition that the first reserved storage number has not reached the upper limit value.

  When the game ball enters the second starting winning opening 14 and is detected by the second starting opening switch 14a, if the variable display of the second special symbol can be started (for example, the variable display of the special symbol ends, the first 2 start condition is satisfied), the variable display (variation) of the second special symbol is started on the second special symbol display 8b, and the variable display of the effect symbol is started on the effect display device 9. That is, the variable display of the second special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to the winning of the second start winning port 14. Unless the variable display of the second special symbol can be started, the second reserved storage number is increased by 1 on condition that the second reserved storage number has not reached the upper limit value.

  The effect display device 9 is for decoration (for effect) during the variable display time of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display 8a and the variable display time of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display 8b. Variable display of the effect design as the design of. The variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 8a and the variable display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 9 are synchronized. Further, the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b and the variable display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 9 are synchronized. In addition, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, and when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b, the effect display device 9 reminds of the big hit. The combination of is stopped and displayed.

  In addition, in a lower position on the display screen of the effect display device 9, a reserved storage display unit (a combined reserved storage display unit) that displays the total number of the first reserved memory and the second reserved memory (total reserved memory number). , A hold display area (not shown) is provided. In the total pending storage display unit, the number of pending storages can be specified as the pending storage display, for example, by the number of displayed predetermined images (by displaying one pending storage image corresponding to each pending storage information, Specify the number of pending storage.) is displayed. As described above, since the total pending storage display unit that displays the total number is provided, it is possible to easily understand the total number of satisfied execution conditions in which the variable display start condition is not satisfied. In each of the first special symbol hold storage display 18a, the second special symbol hold storage display 18b, and the effect display device 9, the light emission display and the image display for indicating the number of hold storage are hold display, or hold Called memory display.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 1, a special variable winning ball device 20 is provided below the variable winning ball device 15. The special variable winning ball device 20 includes an opening/closing plate, and when the specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 8a, the specific display result (big hit symbol) on the second special symbol display device 8b. When the open/close plate is controlled to be opened by the solenoid 21 in the specific game state (big hit game state) that occurs when is displayed and displayed, the special winning opening serving as the winning area is opened. The game ball that has won the special winning opening is detected by the count switch 23.

  In the big hit game state, the repetitive continuation control in which the special variable winning ball device 20 repeats the open state and the closed state is performed. In the repeat continuation control, a state in which the special variable winning ball device 20 is opened is called a round. Therefore, the repeat continuation control is also called round control. In the present embodiment, a plurality of types of big hits are provided, and when it is decided to make a big hit, one of the big hit types is selected.

  On the left side of the effect display device 9, there is provided a normal symbol display 10 that variably displays ordinary symbols that can be identified. In this embodiment, the normal symbol display device 10 is realized by a simple and small-sized display device (for example, a 7-segment LED) that can variably display numbers 0-9. That is, the normal symbol display device 10 is configured to variably display numbers (or symbols) from 0 to 9. Further, the small-sized display is formed, for example, in a rectangular shape.

  When the game ball passes through the gate 32 and is detected by the gate switch 32a, the variable display of the display of the normal symbol display device 10 is started. When the stop symbol on the normal symbol display device 10 is a predetermined symbol (hit symbol. For example, symbol "7".), the variable winning ball device 15 is in a closed state that is disadvantageous to the player for a predetermined number of times and a predetermined time. Changes to an open state that is advantageous for the player. In the vicinity of the normal symbol display device 10, there is provided a normal symbol reservation storage display device 41 having a display section with four LEDs for displaying the number of winning balls that have passed through the gate 32. Every time there is a passage of the game ball to the gate 32, that is, every time the game ball is detected by the gate switch 32a, the normal symbol reservation storage display 41 increases the number of LEDs to be turned on by one. Then, every time the variable display of the normal symbol display device 10 is started, the LED to be turned on is reduced by 1.

  In addition, the accessory 12 is provided above the effect display device 9. The accessory 12 is located between the game board 6 and the effect display device 9, and can be displaced in position by the accessory motor 17. The accessory 12 is usually located in a place that is difficult for the player to visually recognize, and moves to a position (for example, a position in front of the effect display device 9) that can be visually recognized by the player when a predetermined effect is executed.

  At the lower part of the game board 6, there is an outlet 26 into which hit balls that have not been won are taken. Further, four speakers 27 are provided on the upper left and right sides and the lower left and right sides of the outside of the game area 7, for producing sound effects and voices as predetermined voice outputs. A frame LED 28 provided on the front frame is provided on the outer periphery of the game area 7.

  In addition, a prepaid card unit (hereinafter, also simply referred to as a “card unit”) that enables a ball lending by inserting a prepaid card is installed adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1 (not shown).

  In the hit type table of FIG. 2, for each type of hit in the big hit, the big hit probability after the end of the big hit game state, the base after the end of the big hit game state, the fluctuation time after the end of the big hit game state, the number of times of opening in the big hit ( The number of rounds) and the opening time of each round are shown.

  Specifically, in the jackpot gaming state, after the special variable winning ball device 20 is opened, a predetermined end condition of the opened state (a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds) has elapsed in the opened state, or When a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning balls has been established, the closing condition is established. When the opening end condition is satisfied, the continuation right is generated and the special variable winning ball device 20 is opened again. The generation of the continuation right is repeated until the number of times of opening in the jackpot gaming state reaches 15 rounds (final round), which is a predetermined upper limit value.

  Among the "big hits", after being controlled to the big hit game state, the special variation state is a state in which the probability of being decided to be a big hit is higher than the normal state (normal game state that is not the certainty variation state) The type (class) of the big hit that shifts to (the abbreviation of the stochastic variation state and also called the high probability state) is called “probable variation big hit”. Further, in the present embodiment, as the special game state, when the variation time (variation display period) of the special symbol or the effect symbol is controlled to be a time saving state, which is shorter than the non-time saving state, in association with the probability variation state There is. The special game state may be controlled to a time saving state independently of the probability variation state.

  In this way, by shifting to the time saving state, the variation time of the special symbol and the effect symbol is shortened, so when the time saving state is reached, an effective starting winning is likely to occur and a jackpot game may be performed. Increase. Note that, of the "big hits", the kind of big hits that are not shifted to the probability changing state after being controlled to the big hit game state for 15 rounds are called "normal big hits".

  Further, as the special game state, the frequency of the variable winning ball device 15 entering the variable winning ball device 15 is increased by increasing the frequency of opening the variable winning ball device 15 in association with the probability changing state or the time saving state. There is a case where the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to be in a power control support state that facilitates winning (increasing entry and increasing frequency). Since the power control support state is a high base state as described later, it will be mainly referred to as a high base state in the following description.

  Here, the power control support control will be described. As the electric Chu support control, the variation time of the ordinary symbol (the time from the start of variation display to the time of deriving and displaying the display result) is shortened and the display result is derived and displayed early (ordinary symbol shortening control), ordinary symbol Control to increase the probability that the stop symbol becomes a winning symbol (normal symbol probability variation control), control to lengthen the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15 (opening time extension control), and increase the number of times the variable winning ball device 15 is opened. The control (control to increase the number of times of opening) is performed. When such control is performed, the ratio of time during which the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state is higher than when the control is not performed. Therefore, the winning frequency to the second start winning port 14 is increased. Is increased, the game ball is easy to start winning (the execution condition of the variable display on the special symbol display devices 8a, 8b and the effect display device 9 is easily established). By this control, the winning frequency to the second starting winning opening 14 increases, so that the gaming state in which the frequency of establishing the second starting condition and/or the execution frequency of the variable display of the second special symbol increases.

  The state (high-frequency state) in which the winning frequency to the second start winning port 14 is increased by the electric Chu support control is the ratio of the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls in accordance with the winning number to the number of shot balls. Since the "base" is in a higher state than when the control is not performed, it is called "high base state". Further, when such control is not performed, it is called "low base state". Further, such control is control for facilitating the winning of the variable winning ball device 15, that is, the variable winning ball device 15 by supporting the winning with the electric tulip.

  In this embodiment, as a term indicating a state of jackpot probability, a "high-probability state (probability variation state)" and a "low-probability state (non-probability variation state)" are used as a term indicating a combination of base states. , "High base state (electricity chew support control state)" and "low base state (non-electricity chew support control state)".

  In addition, in this embodiment, "low-probability low-base state", "low-probability high-base state", and "high-probability high-base state" are used as terms indicating the combination of the state of the jackpot probability and the state of the base. To use. The “low-probability low-base state” is a state in which a state with a big hit probability is a low-probability state, and a base state is a low-base state. The “low-probability high-base state” is a state in which a state with a big hit probability is a low-probability state, and a base state is a high-base state. The “high-accurate-high-base state” is a state in which a state with a big hit probability is a high-probability state, and a base state is a high-base state.

  As shown in FIG. 2, as the 15-round big hit, a plurality of kinds of big hits, a normal big hit and a probability variation big hit, are provided. The normal jackpot is a jackpot that is controlled to an uncertain variation state, a time saving state, and a high base state (low certainty high base state) after the 15 rounds of the jackpot game state have ended. In normal big hits, the non-probable variation state continues until the next big hit occurs, and the short-time state and the high base state are executed until the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times 100 times, and the next big hit. The condition continues until the condition that occurs first, whichever is earlier, is satisfied. It should be noted that the normal big hit may be a big hit controlled to the non-probable variation state, the non-time saving state, and the non-electricity chew support control state (low accurate low base state).

  The probability variation jackpot is a jackpot in which control is performed to transition to the probability variation state, the time saving state, and the high base state (high-probability high base state) after the 15 rounds of the jackpot game state. In the probability variation big hit, such a condition that the high accuracy high base state is executed until the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times 100 times or the condition until the next big hit occurs, whichever comes first. It continues for a period of time.

  FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing an example of a circuit configuration in the main board (game control board) and the effect control board. The payout control board 37 and the like are also shown in FIG. On the main board 31, a game control microcomputer (corresponding to game control means) 560 for controlling the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program is mounted. The game control microcomputer 560 includes a ROM 54 for storing programs for game control (game progress control), a RAM 55 as a storage unit used as a work memory, a CPU 56 for performing control operations according to the programs, and an I/O port section. Including 57. The game control microcomputer 560 is a 1-chip microcomputer in which the ROM 54 and the RAM 55 are built. The game control microcomputer 560 further includes a random number circuit 503 that generates a hardware random number (random number generated by a hardware circuit).

  Further, the RAM 55 is a backup RAM as a non-volatile storage means, a part or all of which is backed up by a backup power supply created on a power supply board (not shown). That is, even if the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 55 are saved for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply cannot supply power). In particular, at least data according to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means (such as a special symbol process flag) and the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are stored in the backup RAM.

  In the game control microcomputer 560, the CPU 56 executes control according to the program stored in the ROM 54, so that hereinafter, the game control microcomputer 560 (or the CPU 56) executes (or performs processing). Specifically, the CPU 56 executes control according to a program. This also applies to the microcomputers mounted on other boards than the main board 31.

  The random number circuit 503 is a hardware circuit used to generate a random number for determination to determine whether or not to make a big hit based on the display result of the variable display of the special symbol. The random number circuit 503 updates the numerical data according to the set update rule within the numerical range in which the initial value (for example, 0) and the upper limit value (for example, 65535) are set, and is generated at random timing. Based on the fact that the numerical value data is read (extracted) at the time of starting winning, a random number generating function is provided in which the numerical value data read becomes a random value. Further, the game control microcomputer 560 has a function of setting an initial value of the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 503.

  Further, an input driver circuit 58 for giving a detection signal from the gate switch 32a, the first starting opening switch 13a, the second starting opening switch 14a and the count switch 23 to the game controlling microcomputer 560 is also mounted on the main board 31. In addition, the solenoid 16 for opening and closing the variable winning ball device 15 and the output circuit 59 for driving the solenoid 21 for opening and closing the special variable winning ball device 20 forming the special winning opening in accordance with a command from the game control microcomputer 560 are also main. It is mounted on the substrate 31.

  Further, the game control microcomputer 560, the first special symbol display device 8a, the second special symbol display device 8b that displays the special symbol in a variable manner, the normal symbol display device 10 that displays the ordinary symbol in a variable manner, the first special symbol reserved storage. The display control of the display 18a, the second special symbol hold storage display 18b and the normal symbol hold storage display 41 is performed.

  The effect control board 80 is equipped with the effect control microcomputer 100, the ROM 102, the RAM 103, the VDP 109, the I/O port unit 105, and the like. The ROM 102 stores programs and data for effect control such as display control. The RAM 103 is used as a work memory. The ROM 102 and the RAM 103 may be incorporated in the effect control microcomputer 100. The VDP 109 cooperates with the effect control microcomputer 100 to control the display of the effect display device 9.

  The effect control microcomputer 100 instructs the effect control command from the game control microcomputer 560 via the relay board 77 that passes the signal only in one direction from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80. In addition to performing the variable display control of the effect display device 9, the display control of the frame LED 28 provided on the frame side is performed via the lamp driver board 35 and the speaker 27 is performed via the audio output board 70. Various effect controls such as controlling the sound output of are performed.

  In addition, the effect control CPU 101 sends an operation detection signal, which is an information signal indicating that the player has operated the trigger button 125 of the stick controller 122, from the trigger sensor 121 to the input port of the I/O port unit 105. Enter via. In addition, the effect control CPU 101 inputs an operation detection signal, which is an information signal indicating that the player has operated the push button 120, from the push sensor 124 via the input port of the I/O port unit 105. To do. In addition, the effect control CPU 101 inputs an operation detection signal, which is an information signal indicating that the player has operated the operation rod of the stick controller 122, from the tilt direction sensor unit 123 to the I/O port unit 105. Enter through the port. Further, the effect control CPU 101 outputs a drive signal to the vibrator motor 126 via the output port of the I/O port unit 105 to cause the stick controller 122 to vibrate. Further, the effect control CPU 101 drives the accessory motor 17 via the motor drive circuit (not shown) to operate the accessory 12.

  FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. In FIG. 4, types of random numbers, update ranges, uses, and addition conditions are shown. Each random number is used as follows.

  (1) Random R: A random counter for determining whether to make a big hit. Random R is updated by 1 at 10 MHz, added and updated from 0, and then updated up to 65535, which is the upper limit thereof, and then added and updated again from 0. (2) Random 1 (MR1): The type of jackpot (type, normal jackpot, and probability variation jackpot) and the jackpot symbol are determined (for jackpot type determination and jackpot symbol determination). (3) Random 2 (MR2): The type (type) of the variation pattern is determined (for variation pattern type determination). (4) Random 3 (MR3): A variation pattern (variation time) is determined (for variation pattern determination). (5) Random 4 (MR4): It is determined whether or not to generate a hit based on a normal symbol (for normal symbol hit determination). (6) Random 5 (MR5): Determines the initial value of random 4 (for determining random 4 initial value).

  In this embodiment, as the big hit that is the specific game state, a plurality of types including a normal big hit and a probability variation big hit are included. Therefore, when the big hit is decided based on the value of the big hit judging random number (random R), the big hit type is one of these big hits based on the value of the big hit type judging random number (random 1). Determined by type. Further, when the type of big hit is determined, at the same time, the big hit symbol is also determined based on the value of the random number for determining big hit type (random 1). Therefore, the random 1 is also a random number for jackpot symbol determination.

  In addition, the fluctuation pattern is first included in the fluctuation pattern type determined by using the fluctuation pattern type determination random number (random 2) to determine the fluctuation pattern type and using the fluctuation pattern determination random number (random 3). It decides on the fluctuation pattern. As such, in this embodiment, the variation pattern is determined by the two-stage lottery process. The variation pattern type is a group of a plurality of variation patterns grouped according to the characteristics of the variation mode. One or more fluctuation patterns belong to the fluctuation pattern type. The variation pattern type may also be referred to as a variation type.

  In this embodiment, the variation patterns are classified into a normal variation pattern type which is a variation pattern type without reach and a reach variation pattern type which is a variation pattern type with reach.

  Such a variation pattern type is set in such a manner that the selection ratio of the variation pattern type is different between the time saving state and the time saving state when the display result is out of order. When, the fluctuation time is shortened as compared with the case where the time saving state is not set. For example, in the short-time state, in order to shorten the average time of the change time compared to when it is not in the short-time state, the change time of a predetermined change pattern is set shorter than when it is not the short time state, or the change of the most The variation pattern type with the shortest time is selected at a high rate, and even when the reach type is selected, the variation rate of the normal reach with the shortest variation time among the variation pattern types is set to be high. By doing so, the average time of the fluctuation time becomes shorter than when the time saving state is not set.

  By the way, such a variation pattern type is set so that the selection ratios are different when the number of reserved memories of each special symbol to be displayed in variation is greater than or equal to a predetermined number, and when the number is less than the predetermined number. When the number of reserved storage of each special symbol to be variably displayed is a predetermined number or more, compared with when the number of reserved storage of each special symbol is less than the predetermined number, the number-of-holds shortening control that shortens the variable display time is executed. You may do so. For example, in the number-of-holds-shortening control state, it is set so that the rate of selection of a variation pattern type having a shorter variation display time, such as a normal variation pattern type, is higher than in the case of not in the number-of-holding number reduction control state. The average time of the variable display time may be shorter than that in the case where the number of held reservations reduction control is not performed. Further, in the hold number reduction control, even when the same change pattern type is selected, the change display time itself of the change pattern type may be shortened compared to when the hold number reduction control state is not set.

  Further, the variation pattern may be a one-step determination method in which the variation pattern is determined by one random number lottery, instead of the two-step determination method in which the variation pattern type is determined and then the variation pattern is determined.

  FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram showing a big hit determination table and a big hit type determination table. FIG. 5A is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot determination table. The big hit determination table is a set of data stored in the ROM 54, and is a table in which a big hit determination value to be compared with the random R is set. The big hit judgment table includes a normal time (non-probability change time) big hit judgment table used in a normal state (a game state that is not a probability change state, that is, a non-probability change state) and a probability change time big hit judgment table used in a probability change state.

  In the normal-time jackpot determination table, each numerical value described in the left column of FIG. 5(A) is set as a jackpot determination value, and in the probability variation jackpot determination table, it is described in the right column of FIG. 5(A). Each numerical value is set as a jackpot judgment value. The big hit judgment value set in the big hit judgment table during the probability change is the same as the big hit judgment value set in the normal big hit judgment table (the big hit judgment value in normal time or the first big hit judgment value). Due to the addition of the unique jackpot determination value, a larger number (10 times the number) of jackpot determination values (referred to as a jackpot determination value or second jackpot determination value) than in the probability variation big hit determination table are set. .. As a result, the probability variation state is determined to be a big hit with a higher probability than the normal state.

  The CPU 56 extracts the count value of the random number circuit 503 at a predetermined time and compares the extracted value with the value of the big hit judging random number (random R). The big hit judging random number value is shown in FIG. When it matches any of the jackpot determination values shown, it is determined to be a jackpot (normal jackpot or probability variation jackpot) for the special symbol. The “probability” shown in FIG. 5(A) indicates the probability (ratio) of a big hit.

  5(B) and 5(C) are explanatory diagrams showing the jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 54. FIG. 5(B) is a case where the jackpot type is determined by using a reserved memory (also referred to as a first reserved memory) based on the fact that the game ball has won the first starting winning opening 13 (variable display of the first special symbol is It is a first special symbol big hit type determination table (for the first special symbol) to be used). FIG. 5(C) is a case where the jackpot type is determined by using a reserved memory (also referred to as a second reserved memory) based on the fact that the game ball has won the second starting winning opening 14 (the variable display of the second special symbol is It is a second special symbol jackpot type determination table used when performed).

  5(B), and each of the first and second special symbol big hit type determination table of FIG. 5(C), when it is determined that the variable display result is a big hit symbol, for big hit type determination Based on the random number (random 1), the type of jackpot is determined to be either "normal jackpot" or "probability variation jackpot", and is referred to for determining a jackpot symbol.

  In the first special symbol jackpot type determination table of FIG. 5(B), a determination value corresponding to each of the "normal jackpot" and the "probability variation jackpot" (a jackpot type determination) Value) is set. In the second special symbol jackpot type determination table of FIG. 5(C), a determination value corresponding to each of the "normal jackpot" and the "probability variation jackpot" (a jackpot type determination is a numerical value that is compared with the value of random 1). Value) is set.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 5(B) and (C), the jackpot type determination value is also used as a determination value (big hit symbol determination value) for determining the jackpot symbols of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The judgment value corresponding to "normal big hit" is also set as the judgment value corresponding to "3" of the big hit symbols of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The determination value corresponding to the "probable variation big hit" is also set as the determination value corresponding to "7" of the big hit symbol of the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

  Using the jackpot type determination table, the CPU 56 determines the type corresponding to the jackpot type determination value with which the value of random 1 matches as the jackpot type, and also determines the jackpot pattern with the value of random 1 as the jackpot pattern. To do. Thereby, the big hit type and the big hit symbol corresponding to the big hit type are simultaneously determined.

  The first special symbol jackpot type determination table of FIG. 5(B) and the second special symbol jackpot type determination table of FIG. 5(C) have the same proportion determined for the probability variation jackpot. In such a case, it is not necessary to divide the big hit type determination table between the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Further, as the big hit type, when selecting the big hit type from a plurality of big hit types with different maximum round numbers in the big hit game state, the second special symbol big hit type determination table of FIG. It may be set so that the proportion of selection of the jackpot type having a larger number of rounds is higher than that in the first special symbol jackpot type determination table of (B). In this way, in the high base state, it is advantageous for the player to select the type of big hit, and the enjoyment of the game can be improved. Moreover, the second special symbol big hit type determination table of FIG. 5(C) may be set to have a higher rate of probability variation big hits than the first special symbol big hit type determination table of FIG. 5(B). . By doing so, the variable display of the second special symbol can make the probability of the probability variation big hit higher than the variable display of the first special symbol. Further, the first special symbol big hit type determination table may be higher than the second special symbol big hit type determination table, the ratio determined as the probability variation big hit.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 6, a variation pattern table used in the game control microcomputer 560 to select and determine variation patterns of special symbols and effect symbols will be described. FIG. 6 is a diagram showing, in a tabular form, a fluctuation pattern table used to determine a fluctuation pattern.

  In FIG. 6, (a) shows a deviation state determination table from the normal state, and (b) shows a deviation state determination table from the time saving state. Further, (c) shows a normal big hit determination table, and (d) shows a probability variation big hit determination table. The determination tables of FIGS. 6A to 6D are stored in the ROM 54, are selected according to the game state, and are used to determine (determine) the variation pattern type and the variation pattern.

  The determination table shown in FIG. 6 includes a variation pattern type determination table showing the relationship between random 2 and variation pattern types, and a variation pattern determination table showing the relationship between random 3 and variation patterns belonging to each type for each variation pattern type. Including.

  In the columns of “variation pattern type” or “variation pattern” in each table of FIG. 6, “normal” or “normal variation” indicates a normal variation pattern that does not reach.

  In addition, “normal reach” in each table in FIG. 6 indicates a variation pattern of normal reach in which a particularly flashy effect is not executed when the reach state is reached. "Super reach" (SP reach) indicates a variation pattern for performing a reach effect in which a special effect image is displayed when the reach state is reached.

  In addition, as described above, the “super reach” is a variation pattern that has a higher selection rate when a big hit occurs and is more reliable than a “normal reach”. Furthermore, “super reach” is a variation pattern in which the variation time is longer than that of “normal reach” (for example, normal reach 10 seconds, super reach 50 seconds to 80 seconds). In addition, four types of variation patterns are set in the super reach, and the jackpot expectation degree (becomes a jackpot) in the relationship of 1st superreach <2nd superreach <3rd superreach <4th superreach Possibility).

  Note that the “expectation degree” is a concept including the expectation degree for a big hit, the expectation degree for a probability change, and the like. Specifically, the degree of expectation (also called reliability) for a big hit is the degree of expectation that a big hit will occur when each reach variation pattern is selected (ratio of big hits). For example, the reach variation is performed 100 times. If a big hit occurs 60 times, the expectation level for the big hit is 60% (the appearance rate (probability) that the big hit appears is 60%). Further, the degree of expectation with respect to the probability change means the degree of expectation of transition to the probability change state (probability of probability change).

  The variation pattern shown in the out-of-range determination table is a variation pattern in which the final display result of the variable display is the display result of “out”. The fluctuation pattern shown in the normal big hit time determination table is a fluctuation pattern in which the final display result of the variable display is the display result of "normal big hit". The variation pattern shown in the probability variation big hit determination table is a variation pattern in which the final display result of the variation display is the display result of "probability variation big hit".

  Based on these pieces of information, for example, the variation pattern “4th super reach (80 seconds)” shown in the “variation pattern” column of FIG. The variation pattern of the fourth super reach executed in seconds” is shown.

  In the table of FIG. 6, the columns labeled “random 2 range” and “variation pattern type” indicate the function as a variation pattern type determination table section showing the relationship between “random 2 range” and “variation pattern type”. This is the column shown. For example, taking FIG. 6A as an example, all the values of random 2 (1-251) are plural for each of the plural fluctuation pattern types such as “normal”, “normal reach”, and “super reach”. It is divided into the numerical range of. For example, in the case of FIG. 6A, if the value of Random 2 extracted at a predetermined timing matches any one of the judgment values assigned to 140 to 229 among the random number values of 1 to 251. , "Normal reach" is determined as the variation pattern type.

  Further, in the table of FIG. 6, the columns described as “random 3 range” and “variation pattern” indicate the function as a fluctuation pattern determination table section showing the relationship between “random 3 range” and “variation pattern”. It is a column. The variation patterns shown in association with each type in the variation pattern type determination table are the variation patterns belonging to each type. For example, taking FIG. 6A as an example, the fluctuation patterns belonging to the type of “super reach” are “first super reach”, “second super reach”, “third super reach”, and “third super reach”. 4 Super reach”.

  All the values of Random 3 (1-220) are allocated to a plurality of numerical ranges and are assigned to each of the plurality of fluctuation patterns corresponding to each fluctuation pattern type. For example, taking FIG. 6A as an example, when it is determined that the variation pattern type of “super reach” is determined, the random number 3 extracted at a predetermined timing is 1 out of the random number values of 1 to 220. When any of the judgment values assigned to ˜70 matches, the fluctuation pattern of “first super reach (50 seconds)” is determined.

  When the variation display result is out of place for the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the determination table is selected as follows in order to determine the variation pattern. In the non-time saving state, when the variation display result is out of alignment, the out of position determination table in the normal state of FIG. 6A is selected. On the other hand, when the variable display result is out of the time saving state, the out of time saving state determination table in FIG. 6B is selected. By using the determination tables of FIGS. 6A and 6B, the reach ratio is constant when the normal state is lost and when the time saving state is lost, regardless of the number of holdings.

  When the variable display result is a big hit for the first special symbol or the second special symbol regardless of whether it is a time saving state, in order to determine the variation pattern, the determination table is selected as follows. When the variation display result is the normal big hit, the normal big hit time determination table of FIG. 6C is selected. When the variation display result is the probability variation big hit regardless of the time saving state, the probability variation big hit time determination table of FIG. 6D is selected.

  In the deviation determination table for the time saving state of FIG. 6B, the variation time of the normal fluctuation is set shorter than that for the deviation determination table for the normal state of FIG. 6A. 6B, the variation time is shorter than the reach variation (including the normal reach variation and the super reach variation) in the normal state deviation determination table of FIG. 6A as compared with the normal state deviation determination table. Normal fluctuations (non-reach deviation fluctuations (variations that cause deviation display results instead of reach)) are high, and the fluctuations that reach longer than normal fluctuations are less likely to be determined. The data is set.

  As a result, compared to the case of the non-time saving state (normal state), in the time saving state, the rate of selection of the variation pattern with the short variation time is higher, so that in the time saving state, the non-time saving state is more likely to be selected. The fluctuation display is performed on average in a shorter fluctuation time than the case. By selecting the determination table in this way, the time saving state can be realized. Further, by setting the normal fluctuation such that the fluctuation time is shorter in the time-saving state than in the non-time-saving state, it is possible to shorten the pending digestion during the time-saving state.

  In the determination tables of FIGS. 6A and 6B, which are selected when there is a deviation, the data is set so that the selection ratio of the type of reach is normal reach>super reach Has been done. On the other hand, in the determination tables of FIG. 6C and FIG. 6D that are selected when the jackpot is a big hit, the selection ratios of the types of reach are selected in the relationship of normal reach<super reach. The data is set. As a result, when the jackpot is hit, the ratio of the reach effect of the super reach (the ratio of the reach effect of the super reach when the reach is selected) is higher than when it is out of reach, so that the reach of the super reach is increased. The production can enhance the player's expectation.

  Further, in the determination table of FIG. 6(d), which is selected when the probability variation big hit of the big hits is made, compared to the determination table of FIG. 6(c) which is selected when the big hit is the normal big hit, the normal reach is achieved. On the other hand, the data is set so that the ratio of selecting the type of super reach production is high. As a result, when the probability variation jackpot is high, the proportion of the reach effect of super reach reached (the proportion of the reach effect of the super reach when the reach is selected) is higher than that of the normal jackpot. By performing the reach effect of the reach, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for the probability variation big hit.

  In addition, such a variation pattern, when the total number of reserved storages (total value) of the first special symbol and the second special symbol which are displayed in a variable manner is a predetermined number or more (for example, the total number of reserved storages is 3 or more) When the total number of pending storages is greater than or equal to the predetermined number, the variation time is set to be different from that when the total number of pending storages is less than the predetermined number by setting the selection ratio differently when the total number of pending storages is less than the predetermined number. You may make it perform the hold|maintenance number shortening control which is shortened. However, even under the condition that the hold number reduction control is executed (for example, the total hold storage number is 3 or more), by keeping the ratio of the reach (including the normal reach and the super reach) constant, the expectation for the reach is maintained. In addition, it is also possible to execute the hold number reduction time reduction control so that the variation time is not shortened only in the super reach among the reach. Furthermore, the number-of-holding time saving control may be executable by selecting a high rate of normal variation having a short variation time, or may be executable by shortening the variation time of each variation pattern itself, The combination may be sufficient.

  FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560. In the game control microcomputer 560, as shown in FIG. 7, various effect control commands are transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 according to the game control state.

  Main commands in FIG. 7 will be described. Command 80XX (H) is a production control command (variation pattern command) for designating a variation pattern of the effect symbol that is variably displayed on the effect display device 9 in response to the variable display of the special symbol (corresponding to each variation pattern XX. ). That is, when a unique number is given to each of the usable fluctuation patterns as shown in FIG. 6, there is a fluctuation pattern command corresponding to each of the fluctuation patterns specified by the number. “(H)” indicates a hexadecimal number. The effect control command for designating the variation pattern is also a command for designating the variation start. Therefore, when the effect control CPU 101 receives the command 80XX(H), the effect control CPU 101 controls the effect display device 9 to start the variable display of effect symbols.

  The commands 8C01(H) to 8C03(H) are display result designating commands indicating whether or not to make a big hit and a big hit type.

  Command 8D01 (H) is a first symbol variation designation command indicating that the variable display of the first special symbol is started. Command 8D02 (H) is a second symbol variation designation command indicating that the variable display of the second special symbol is started. The command 8F00 (H) is a command (designation designation command) for designating the end of the variation of the first and second special symbols.

  The commands A001 to A002 (H) are big hit start designation commands for designating the big hit game state start for each big hit type (normal big hit or probability variation big hit).

  The command A1XX(H) is a special winning opening open designation command which indicates a display during opening of the special winning opening for the number (round) indicated by XX. A2XX(H) is a command after opening the special winning opening indicating that the opening (closing) of the number (round) of the XX number of times is open.

  The commands A301 to A302 (H) are jackpot end designation commands that designate the jackpot gaming state end for each jackpot type (normal jackpot or probability variation jackpot).

  The command A 401 (H) is a first start winning a prize designating command that specifies that the first starting award has been won. The command A402(H) is a second start winning a prize designating command that specifies that the second starting award has been won.

  The command B000(H) is a normal state designation command that designates that the gaming state is the normal state (low probability state). The command B001 (H) is a time saving state designation command for designating that the gaming state is a time saving state (high base state). The command B002(H) is a probability variation state designation command that designates that the gaming state is a probability variation state (high probability state).

  The command C0XX(H) is a total reserved storage number designation command indicating the total reserved storage number. The command C100(H) is a total reserved storage number subtraction designation command indicating that the total reserved storage number is decremented by one. In this embodiment, the command for designating the total number of reserved storages is executed when the game ball is won into the first starting winning opening 13 or the second starting winning opening 14 (for example, when the starting opening switch passing process described later is executed). , To the effect control microcomputer 100. Further, the summed reserved storage number subtraction designation command is sent to the effect control microcomputer 100 at the start of variable display (for example, at the time of execution of a special symbol variable display process described later). The total reserved storage designation command and the reserved storage number subtraction designation command may be used together. For example, the total reserved storage number designation command may be used as a command capable of specifying the reserved storage number after subtraction. It should be noted that commands for specifying the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number are respectively transmitted instead of the total reserved memory number, and the effect control microcomputer 100 causes the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number. The total value of and may be specified as the total pending storage number.

  The command C2XX(H) and the command C3XX(H) are results of winning determination such as a big hit determination, a big hit type determination, a variation pattern type determination, etc. at the time of a start winning to the first starting winning opening 13 or the second starting winning opening 14. It is a production control command indicating the content. Of these, the command C2XX (H) is a symbol designating command indicating whether or not to be a big jackpot in the determination result at the time of winning, and the determination result of the type of the jackpot. Further, the command C3XX(H) is a variation type command indicating a determination result (variation pattern type determination result) of which determination value range the variation pattern type random number value is in the winning determination result. Is.

  In this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether or not to be a big hit at the time of starting winning, whether to be a kind of big hit, and which range of judgment values of the random number for fluctuation pattern type judgment. .. Then, in the EXT data of the symbol designating command, a value designating a big hit and a value designating the type of the big hit are set, and the control for transmitting to the effect control microcomputer 100 is performed. The EXT data of the variation type command is set to a value that specifies the range of the determination value as the determination result of the variation pattern type, and the control for transmitting to the effect control microcomputer 100 is performed. In this embodiment, the effect control microcomputer 100 can recognize whether or not the display result is a big hit at the time of the start winning, and the type of the big hit, based on the value set in the symbol designating command, The variation pattern type can be recognized based on the variation type command.

  Next, a configuration example of an area (holding storage buffer) for storing data such as random numbers (holding storage data) corresponding to holding storage on the game control microcomputer 560 side will be described. The hold storage buffer is provided in the RAM 55.

  A storage area corresponding to the upper limit value (4 in this example) of the first reserved storage number is secured in the first reserved storage buffer. In addition, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value (4 in this example) of the second reserved storage number is secured in the second reserved storage buffer. In the first pending storage buffer and the second pending storage buffer, a big hit determination random number (random R) that is a hardware random number, a big hit type determination random number (random 1) that is a software random number, and a fluctuation pattern type determination random number (Random 2) and a random number for fluctuation pattern determination (random 3) are stored.

  Based on the winning in the first starting winning opening 13 or the second starting winning opening 14, the CPU 56 extracts such random number values from the random number circuit 503 and the random counter for generating the software random number, and outputs them to the A process of saving (storing) in the save area of the first pending storage buffer or the second pending storage buffer is executed. Specifically, these random number values are extracted and stored in the first reserved storage buffer based on the winning of the first starting winning opening 13. Further, based on the winning of the second starting winning opening 14, these random number values are extracted and stored in the second reserved storage buffer.

  Storing the above-described information regarding the starting winning in the first reserved storage buffer or the second reserved storage buffer may be referred to as “reserved storage”. It should be noted that the variation pattern type determination random number (random 2) and the variation pattern determination random number (random 3) are not extracted at the time of starting winning and stored in the storage area in advance, but a variation pattern setting process (special It may be extracted at the time of the start of the fluctuation of the symbol).

  As will be described later, the data thus stored in the hold storage buffer is read at the time of winning the start and used for the pre-reading notice effect, and is read at the start of the variable display and used for the variable display.

  When there is a starting winning prize to the first starting winning opening 13 or the second starting winning opening 14, it is referred to as a symbol designating command, a variation type command, a first (second) starting winning designating command, and a total reserved memory number designating command. Such a command indicating the determination result of the start winning determination process is transmitted from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80. In the start winning prize reception command buffer provided in the RAM 103 of the effect control microcomputer 100, the received symbol designating command, variation type command, first (second) starting winning designating command, and total reserved memory number designating command. A storage area for storing data capable of specifying the received command is secured so that various commands such as can be stored in association with each other.

  In this embodiment, the effect control pattern of the effect symbol performed corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the variable display operation of the effect symbol, the reach, corresponding to a plurality of types of variation patterns. It is composed of data indicating the control contents of various effect operations such as effect display operations in effects, or various effect operations that are not accompanied by variable display of effect symbols. In addition, the notice production control pattern is composed of data or the like indicating the control content of the production operation that is the notice production executed corresponding to the notice patterns prepared in advance. Various effect control patterns correspond to various effect operations executed according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and are composed of data indicating the control content thereof.

  Next, the operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the game control microcomputer 560 on the main board 31 executes a predetermined main process, a timer interrupt is periodically performed every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) to execute the timer interrupt process. By doing so, various game controls can be executed.

  In the main processing, for example, necessary initial setting processing, normal time initializing processing, game state recovery processing other than normal time, random number circuit setting processing (initializing the random number circuit 503), display random number updating processing (variation pattern) Type determination, update processing of various random numbers such as fluctuation pattern determination), and random number update processing for initial value (update processing of initial value of count value of random number generation counter for normal symbol determination) and the like are executed.

  FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process. When the timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 56 executes the timer interrupt process of steps S (hereinafter, simply referred to as “S”) 20 to S34 shown in FIG. In the timer interrupt process, first, a power-off detection process is performed to detect whether a power-off signal has been output (whether the power-on signal has been turned on) (S20). Then, the detection signals of the gate switch 32a, the first starting port switch 13a, the second starting port switch 14a, and the count switch 23 are input through the input driver circuit 58, and the states thereof are determined (switch process: S21). ..

  Next, the CPU 56 is a first special symbol display device 8a, a second special symbol display device 8b, a normal symbol display device 10, a first special symbol reserved memory display device 18a, a second special symbol reserved memory display device 18b, a normal symbol. A display control process for controlling the display of the pending storage display 41 is executed (S22). About the first special symbol display device 8a, the second special symbol display device 8b and the normal symbol display device 10, a control for outputting a drive signal to each display device according to the contents of the output buffer set in S32 and S33. To execute.

  In addition, a process of updating the count value of each counter for generating each random number for determination such as a random number for normal symbol determination and a random number for determining jackpot type used for game control is performed (determination random number update process: S23). . The CPU 56 further performs a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number and the display random number (initial value random number update process, display random number update process: S24, S25).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs a special symbol process process (S26). In the special symbol process process, the first special symbol display device 8a, the second special symbol display device 8b and the special symbol process flag for controlling the special winning opening in a predetermined order are executed according to the corresponding process, and the special symbol process. The value of the flag is updated according to the game state.

  Then, a normal symbol process process is performed (S27). In the normal symbol process processing, the CPU 56 executes the corresponding process according to the normal symbol process flag for controlling the display state of the normal symbol display device 10 in a predetermined order, and the value of the normal symbol process flag is in the gaming state. Update accordingly.

  Further, the CPU 56 performs a process of sending a production control command to the production control microcomputer 100 (production control command control process: S28). Further, the CPU 56 performs an information output process for outputting data such as big hit information, starting information, probability variation information, etc. supplied to the hall management computer (S29).

  Further, the CPU 56 executes prize ball processing for setting the number of prize balls based on the detection signals of the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a and the count switch 23 (S30).

  In this embodiment, the RAM area (output port buffer) corresponding to the output state of the output port is provided, but the CPU 56 relates to ON/OFF of the solenoid in the RAM area corresponding to the output state of the output port. The content is output to the output port (S31: output process).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs special symbol display control processing for setting special symbol display control data for performing special symbol effect display according to the value of the special symbol process flag in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data ( S32).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs a normal symbol display control process for setting the normal symbol display control data for performing the effect display of the normal symbol in the output buffer for setting the normal symbol display control data according to the value of the normal symbol process flag ( S33). Further, the CPU 56 outputs the drive signal in S22 in accordance with the display control data set in the output buffer to execute the effect display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display device 10.

  After that, the interrupt permission state is set (S34), and the process is terminated. According to the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is activated every predetermined time.

  FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing the special symbol process process (S26). In the special symbol process process, a process for controlling the first special symbol display device 8a or the second special symbol display device 8b and the special winning opening is executed. In the special symbol process process, the starting port switch passing process is executed (S312). Then, any one of S300 to S307 is performed according to the internal state.

  In the game control microcomputer 560, the RAM 55 stores the pending storage data (first pending storage data) such as the big hit determination random number obtained based on the starting winning into the first starting winning opening 13, as described above. A first reserved storage buffer, and a second reserved storage buffer for storing reserved storage data (second reserved storage data) such as a big hit determination random number obtained based on a winning start to the second starting winning opening 14 Is provided. A storage area corresponding to the upper limit value (4 in this example) of the number of storages of each pending storage is secured in each of the pending storage buffers.

  In the starting opening switch passage processing, if the first starting opening switch 13a is turned on, the number of stored first reserved storage data is provided on condition that the first reserved storage number has not reached the upper limit value (for example, 4). The value of the first reserved storage number counter that counts the number is incremented by 1, and numerical data (for example, a big hit determination random number, a variation pattern type determination random number, and a variation pattern determination are obtained from a random number circuit 503 or a counter for generating a software random number. Random numbers) are extracted and stored (stored) in the storage area of the first pending storage buffer. Further, the value of the total pending storage number counter is incremented by 1, and a process of storing (storing) data indicating “first” in the pending specific area corresponding to the value of the total pending storage number counter after totaling is executed. On the other hand, if the second starting opening switch 14a is turned on, the number of stored second reserved storage data is counted on the condition that the second reserved storage number has not reached the upper limit value (for example, 4). The value of the reserved memory number counter is incremented by 1, and numerical data (for example, a big hit determination random number, a variation pattern type determination random number, and a variation pattern determination random number) are extracted from a random number circuit 503 or a counter for generating a software random number. Then, a process of storing (storing) them in the storage area of the second reserved storage buffer is executed. Further, the value of the total pending storage number counter is incremented by 1, and a process of storing (storing) data indicating “second” in the pending specific area corresponding to the value of the total pending storage number counter after totaling is executed.

  The processing of S300 to S307 is the following processing. The special symbol normal process (S300) is a process of determining whether or not the display result of the variable display is a big hit, and determining a big hit type in the case of a big hit. The fluctuation pattern setting process (S301) determines a fluctuation pattern (a fluctuation pattern type determination random number and a fluctuation pattern determination using the fluctuation pattern determination random number), and measures a fluctuation time according to the determined fluctuation pattern. Is a process for performing control such as start of clocking of a variable time timer.

  The display result designation command transmission process (S302) is a process for controlling the production control microcomputer 100 to transmit a display result designation command. The special symbol variation process (S303) is a process of advancing the process to the special symbol stop process when the variation time of the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern setting process elapses. Special symbol stop process (S304), the variation display in the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b when the passage of the variation time corresponding to the determined variation pattern is timed by the variation time timer It is a process of stopping and deriving and displaying a stop symbol.

  The special winning opening opening pre-processing (S305) is processing for performing control of opening the special winning opening in the special variable winning a prize ball device 20 according to the type of the big hit. The special winning opening opening process (S306) confirms the control of transmitting the effect control command for the round display effect in the big hit game state to the effect control microcomputer 100, and the establishment of the closing condition of the special winning opening. This is processing for performing processing and the like. If the closing condition for the special winning opening is satisfied and there are still remaining rounds, the process proceeds to the pre-opening processing for the special winning opening (S305). When all rounds have been completed, the process shifts to the big hit ending process (S307). The big hit ending process (S307) is a process for causing the effect control microcomputer 100 to perform display control for notifying the player that the big hit game state has ended.

  Next, the operation of the effect control microcomputer 100 will be described. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the effect control main processing executed by the effect control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the effect control CPU 101) mounted on the effect control board 80.

  When the power is turned on, the effect control CPU 101 starts execution of effect control main processing. In the production control main processing, first, initialization processing for clearing the RAM area, setting various initial values, and initializing a timer for determining the production control activation interval (for example, 2 ms) is performed (S701). ). After that, the effect control CPU 101 shifts to the loop processing for monitoring the timer interrupt flag (S702). When the timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 101 sets the timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. If the timer interrupt flag is set in the effect control main process, the effect control CPU 101 clears the flag (S703) and executes the following effect control process.

  In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 101 first analyzes the received effect control command and sets data such as a flag that can specify what the received effect control command is a command to instruct. Processing (for example, processing for storing data that can specify the received command in various command storage areas provided in the RAM 103) is performed (command analysis processing: S704). Next, the effect control CPU 101 performs effect control process processing (S705). In the effect control process process, in order to perform various effects such as variable display of effect symbols on the effect display device 9 in accordance with the content of the effect control command analyzed in S704, the current control among the processes corresponding to the control state is performed. A process corresponding to the state (production control process flag) is selected to execute production control.

  Next, a random number used by the production control microcomputer 100 (SR1-1 for determining the left stop symbol of the production symbol, SR1-2 for determining the middle stop symbol of the production symbol, SR1-3 for determining the right stop symbol of the production symbol) Etc.) is executed to execute a random number updating process for updating the count value of the counter (S706). Each of such random numbers SR1-1 to SR1-3 is generated by the count of a random counter that updates the count value by software, and each is cyclically updated within a predetermined range, and each of them is updated. It is used as a random number by being extracted at a specified timing.

  Next, a hold storage display control process for controlling the display state of the hold display in the hold display area (moving, deleting, etc. of the hold display) is executed (S707).

  By performing such effect control main processing, in the effect control microcomputer 100, the effect display device 9, various lamps, and the effect display device 9 are transmitted according to the effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 and received. By controlling the effect devices such as the speakers 27L and 27R, various effect controls according to the game state are performed.

  FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing the effect control process process (S705) in the effect control main process shown in FIG. In the effect control process process, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not to execute the prefetch effect, and executes the prefetch effect process (S700) for selecting the type of the prefetch effect, and then the value of the effect control process flag. Depending on the, any one of S800 to S807 is performed.

  In the production control process processing, the following processing is executed. In the production control process processing, the display state of the production display device 9 is controlled, and the variable display of the production symbol is realized, but the control relating to the variable display of the production symbol in synchronization with the variation of the first special symbol is also the second special symbol. The control related to the variable display of the effect design in synchronization with the change of is also executed in one effect control process process.

  The pre-reading effect process (S700) is a process of performing pre-reading determination such as whether to execute the pre-reading effect, and determining an effect mode when executing the pre-reading effect. Look-ahead production is, before the order of the variable display (symbol fluctuation) of the special symbol based on certain reserved information (reserved storage information) comes, the reserved information is pre-read and the fluctuation of the special symbol based on the reserved information. It is a production technique such as judging the contents of the display and giving an advance notice in advance of how the variable display of the future special symbol will be. For example, when the hold information is a big hit, before the variable display by the hold information is executed, the big hit may occur afterwards based on the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the hold information. An effect such as giving a notice is performed as a look-ahead effect. Hereinafter, the variable display based on the hold information that is the target of the prefetching effect is referred to as “target variable display”.

  The variation pattern command reception waiting process (S800) is a process of confirming whether or not the variation pattern command is received from the game control microcomputer 560. If the variation pattern command has been received, the process proceeds to effect symbol variation start processing.

  The effect symbol variation start process (S801) is a process for controlling so that the variable display of the effect symbol (decorative symbol) is started. The effect symbol fluctuating process (S802) is a process of controlling the switching timing of each fluctuating state (fluctuation speed) forming the fluctuating pattern. The effect symbol variation stop process (S803) is a process of stopping the variable display of the effect symbol (decorative symbol) and deriving and displaying the display result of the variable symbol (final stop symbol).

  The big hit display process (S804) is a process of performing display control such as control for displaying a fanfare effect for notifying the effect display device 9 of the occurrence of the big hit after the end of the variable time. The in-round process (S805) is a process for performing display control during the round. When the round end condition is satisfied, if the final round has not ended, the process proceeds to round post-processing, and if the final round has ended, the jackpot end process proceeds. The post-round processing (S806) is processing for performing display control between rounds. When the round start condition is satisfied, the process moves to the in-round process. The big hit end effect process (S807) is a process of performing display control in the effect display device 9 to notify the player that the big hit game state has ended.

  Process control CPU101, from the start of the variable display to the stop of the variable display, and during the predetermined performance control period from the start of the big hit game state to the end of the big hit game state, the process stored in the ROM102 The production device (production component) such as the production display device 9 is controlled according to the process data set in the table.

  The process table is composed of process timer set values and data in which a plurality of combinations of display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data are collected. In the display control execution data, data and the like indicating the form of each variation that constitutes the variation mode during the variation time (variation display time) of the variation display of the effect design (decoration pattern) are described. Specifically, the data related to the change of the display screen of the effect display device 9 is described. Further, the process timer set value is set with the change time in the form of the change. The effect control CPU 101 refers to the process table, and performs control to display effect symbols in a variation mode set in the display control execution data only for the time set in the process timer set value. Such a process table is prepared according to each variation pattern.

[Identification information]
Next, the identification information used in this embodiment will be described. In the present embodiment, the effect display device 9 variably displays effect symbols as a plurality of types of identification information capable of identifying each. The effect design as the identification information is composed of numeral information (number) as the first information and decoration information (character) as the second information. An image showing a number as the first information and an image showing a character as the second information are in one-to-one correspondence with each other. The first information may be Chinese characters, English characters, predetermined marks or symbols, etc. The second information may be an effect display other than the character, and may be a decorative display that matches the motif of the first information.

  FIG. 12 is a diagram showing the relationship between the first information and the second information. As shown in FIG. 12, "character A" is associated with the number "1", "character B" is associated with the number "2", and is associated with the number "3". Then, "character C" is associated, "character D" is associated with the numeral "4", "character E" is associated with the numeral "5", and "character E" is associated with the numeral "5". "Character F" is associated with "6", "Character G" is associated with number "7", and "Character H" is associated with number "8". , "Character I" is associated with the number "9".

  The identification information display pattern includes a first display pattern that displays numeric information (numerals) without displaying decoration information (characters) and a second display pattern that displays numeric information (numerals) and decoration information (characters). Is provided. The numerical information (numerals) as the first information and the decoration information (characters) as the second information are changed in display mode by changing to the first display pattern or the second display pattern in the variable display. ing. A change in the display mode of the number as the first information and the character as the second information in the variable display will be described below.

[Regarding display mode of variable display]
FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a mode of variable display. In particular, FIG. 13 shows a display mode at the time of shortening variation. At the time of shortening change, all three symbols start changing at the same time, and all symbols stop changing at the same time within a short change time. On the other hand, at the time of normal fluctuation, the fluctuations are started simultaneously for the three symbols, and the fluctuation is stopped in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol. It should be noted that at the time of shortening variation, the same symbols as those at the time of normal variation may be stopped, or the symbols may start moving one by one at the start of variation.

  In FIG. 13, the lapse of time in the variable display is shown in the order of FIGS. FIG. 13A shows the display screen of the effect display device 9 at the start of fluctuation. At the start of fluctuation shown in FIG. 13A, the effect symbol is stopped, and indicates a state immediately before fluctuation display is started. On the display screen of the effect display device 9, an effect pattern as identification information formed from numbers and characters is displayed. The effect design formed of numbers and characters is displayed in a wide display range on the display screen of the effect display device 9. Further, the display range of the number and the character is wider than that of the character.

  As shown in FIG. 13(b), the effect design formed of numbers and characters as shown in FIG. 13(a) is only numbers as the variation disclosure time symbol action. In this way, at the start of fluctuation, after the effect symbol starts to change downward, the variable display by the number which is the first display pattern is started. In FIGS. 13(a) to 13(b), the character is enlarged, and after the movement at the start of fluctuation is performed, the character is erased and the number becomes larger than before the fluctuation starts, and only the downward numbers are used. The variable display is executed. FIG. 13C shows a display mode of the effect symbol that is changing. The downward arrow indicates that the numbers are moving downward.

  FIG. 13D shows the symbol action when the variable display of the effect symbol is stopped. At the time of variable stop, an operation is performed in which the three numbers that have been changing at high speed stop at the stop position in the center of the display screen. After that, the three numerical symbols move downward from the stop position of the symbol. As the variable stop time symbol action at this time, the characters B, C, and H viewed the screen of the effect display device 9 from the front so as to push down the symbol at the stop position shown by the dotted line in FIG. An effect that is displayed so as to fly forward from the depth direction is executed. Along with the effect, the numbers are further moved downward and displayed in a reduced display mode.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 13(f), when the fluctuation is stopped, the effect design is displayed in the second display pattern including the numbers and the characters. Here, the display mode at the time of changing from the second display pattern consisting of numbers and characters to the first display pattern consisting of only numbers as the variation start symbol action, and the first display consisting of only numbers as the variation stop symbol action. The display mode when changing from the pattern to the second display pattern including numbers and characters is different. For example, when the fluctuation starts, the character is enlarged and displayed forward, and when the fluctuation is stopped, the character appears forward from the depth direction (rear) when the screen of the effect display device 9 is viewed from the front, The display mode is different from the movement of pushing down the numbers. By doing so, it is possible to preferably display the numbers and the characters.

  The movement at the time of fluctuation stop differs depending on the characters A to I, but the movement at the time of starting fluctuation may be common to all symbols. In this way, since the three symbols start moving at the same time when the fluctuation starts, the symbol actions can be unified and the appearance can be improved.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 13, the size of the numbers displayed in the second display pattern is different from the size of the numbers displayed in the first display pattern. For example, the size of the numbers displayed when the fluctuation starts and when the fluctuation stops displayed by the second display pattern has a smaller display range than the size of the changing numbers displayed by the first display pattern. In this way, when the fluctuation starts or stops, the player can be made to pay attention to the display mode consisting of numbers and characters, and during the fluctuation display, only the numbers are displayed in a display range larger than when the fluctuation stops. By performing the variable display, it is possible to easily recognize the transition of the effect design during the variable display, and it is possible to suitably display the numbers and the characters.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 13, as a symbol action at the time of variation stop, the effect of stopping the variation display is executed by moving the number downward so as to display the character larger than the number. In this way, the display mode when displaying numbers and characters can be made interesting and the numbers and characters can be displayed appropriately.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 13, when the variable display is stopped, the display is performed to make the character appear wider than the display range of the numbers before the stop. By doing so, it is possible to reduce a feeling of strangeness when the first display pattern is changed to the second display pattern. Therefore, it is possible to preferably display the numbers and the characters.

  As shown in FIGS. 13(d) and 13(e), as a variation stop symbol action, an effect is displayed in which the character is displayed so as to jump forward from the depth direction when the effect display device 9 is viewed from the front. To be done. By doing so, a powerful display using the character can be performed.

  Further, there is a correspondence relationship between numbers and characters as shown in FIG. 12, and as shown in FIG. 13, variable display is stopped in a pattern for displaying characters according to numbers. In this way, different characters will appear according to the numbers, so that the numbers and characters can be displayed appropriately.

[Regarding the pattern display pattern when non-reach is lost]
FIG. 14 is a timing chart of the symbol display pattern at the time of non-reach. The variable display shown in FIG. 13 is executed at the timing shown in FIG. At time t0, the variable display is started (see FIG. 13A). Next, the fluctuation start action is executed from time t0 to t1 (see FIG. 13B). In the action at the start of variation, the effect design consisting of the number and the character is only the number, and the variation display in which the number moves downward is executed. After that, in the period of T1, variable display using only numbers is executed (see FIG. 13C).

  From t2 to t3 after T1, the variation stop time symbol action is executed (see FIGS. 13D and 13E). In the variation stop time symbol action, when the symbol displayed only by the numbers moves below the stop position when the variation stops, when the character sees the screen of the effect display device 9 from the front in the empty space. The effect of jumping forward from the depth direction of is executed. Further, in the variation stop time symbol action, the character is displayed larger than the number when the number moves downward. Then, at t3, the variable display is stopped by the second display pattern consisting of numbers and characters (see FIG. 13(f)).

  As shown in FIG. 14, a first change effect of changing only numbers from numbers to characters is executed as an action at fluctuation stop, and a second change effect of changing only numbers to numbers from characters and characters is performed as an action at change start. Run. The execution modes are different between the first change effect and the second change effect. In the variable stop pattern action executed as the first change effect, the character jumps forward from the depth direction when the screen of the effect display device 9 is viewed from the front, the number moves downward, and the character is more important than the number. In the variation start symbol action that is displayed in a large size and is executed as the second change effect, the characters are erased from the numbers and the characters, and only the numbers displayed larger than before the change fluctuate downward. By doing so, it is possible to preferably display the numbers and the characters.

[About the pattern display pattern for SP reach jackpot]
Next, a pattern display pattern when super reach (SP reach) occurs and a big hit is described. FIG. 15 is a timing chart of the SP reach jackpot symbol display pattern. At time t0, the variable display is started. Next, the fluctuation start action is executed from time t0 to t1. In the action at the start of variation, the effect design consisting of the number and the character is only the number, and the variation display in which the number moves downward is executed. After that, in the period of T1, variable display using only numbers is executed.

  After that, at t2, as a symbol action at the time of left symbol fluctuation stop, the effect symbol is changed from the first display pattern consisting of only numbers to the second display pattern consisting of numbers and characters, and the state is temporarily stopped (the symbol is not completely stopped. Then, it will move slightly up and down). The numbers and the movement of the character at this time are the same as those of the above-described action at the time of fluctuation stop. Then, at t3, as a right symbol fluctuation stop action, the effect design is changed from the first display pattern consisting of only numbers to the second display pattern consisting of numbers and characters, and the state is temporarily stopped. The numbers and the movements of the character at this time are the same as those in the above-described action at the time of fluctuation stop.

  Then, the reach formation action is executed from the state of t3 to t4. In the reach formation action, an effect of greatly moving the character displayed as the second display pattern is executed. For example, an effect of rotating the character in the horizontal direction after the player has reached the reach state is executed, so that the effect of showing the front and the back of the character is executed. It should be noted that the action of the action during the reach formation of the character may be different for each character. Also, the movement of the character may be changed according to the jackpot expectation. In addition, the numeric symbols may be left as they are at the stages of t2 and t3 until reaching the reach state, and the left and right numeric symbols (reach symbols) may be the second display pattern consisting of the numbers and the characters at the timing of t4.

  After that, the middle symbol scrolls at high speed from the normal reach effect executed only with the numerical symbols, and at t5, the reach develops to SP reach. When the SP reach is developed, the effect design indicated by a number is displayed as a small design in a reduced display mode at the corner (for example, the right corner) of the screen of the effect display device 9.

  In the period of T2 after developing to SP reach, the small symbol action pattern is executed. In the period of the small symbol action pattern, the SP reach effect is executed, and the effect that the small symbol moves drastically is executed. For example, during the small symbol action pattern, an effect in which the small symbol bounces up and down or an effect of rotating in the vertical and horizontal directions may be executed in accordance with the effect sound that flows in the SP reach effect. Then, at t6, the fact that the SP reach has ended and the big hit has been displayed is displayed by the symbol arrangement of only the numbers which are enlarged from the small symbols and become the normal size.

  The pattern of the small symbol action may be changed depending on the type of SP reach (first super reach to fourth super reach, etc.). Further, the operation of the small symbol may be different depending on the type of music played during SP reach. Further, the movement of the small symbol may be changed during the SP reach. Further, the operation mode of the small symbols may be changed depending on the degree of expectation of a big hit. Further, the small symbol may be displayed before the SP reach is developed, and the operation mode of the small symbol may be different before and after the SP reach development depending on the type of the SP reach. By doing so, the mode of operation of the small symbols is diversified, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  After that, at t7, an effect of returning from the SP reach background to the normal background is executed. Furthermore, after that, the symbols stop changing and are displayed in the second display pattern consisting of the numbers and the characters from the first display pattern of only the numbers until the fixed display (the state in which the symbols are completely stopped) is reached. Executes the decided action. As the character deciding operation, for example, an effect is shown in which the character makes a V sign and the number which is the jackpot display result is confirmed.

  As shown in FIG. 15, since a display in which the character moves greatly is performed as an action during reach formation, the movement of the character can be noticed, and the numbers and characters can be displayed appropriately.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 15, the symbols are aligned only with the numbers at the end of the SP reach, and the determination operation is performed with the numbers and the characters at the time of final display after returning to the normal background. By doing so, it is possible to provide a display mode of the effect design suitable for each scene of the effect, and it is possible to suitably display the numbers and the characters.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 15, as the small symbol action pattern B, an effect of violently moving the small symbol according to the effect sound during SP reach is executed. By doing so, it is possible to preferably display the numbers as the small symbols reduced and displayed.

  Before the SP reach, the small symbols may not be displayed. Specifically, before the SP reach is developed, it is possible to simply perform the effect of leaving the reach with only the numbers, and thereafter, when the SP reach is developed, the numerical symbol may be displayed as a small symbol.

  Next, a process for determining a symbol display pattern and the like will be described. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol variation start process (S801) in the effect control process process. In the effect symbol variation start process, the effect control CPU 101 performs the following process.

  In the effect symbol variation start processing, it is confirmed whether or not it is determined that the variation display result is out of alignment (S601). Whether or not it is determined to be out is determined by, for example, whether or not the display result 1 designation command is stored in the display result designation command storage area. If it is determined to be out of alignment, it is confirmed whether or not a command corresponding to the non-reach fluctuation pattern is received as the fluctuation pattern command (S602). Whether or not the command corresponding to the non-reach fluctuation pattern is received is determined by, for example, the data stored in the fluctuation pattern command storage area.

  When it is determined that the command corresponding to the non-reach variation pattern has been received, the display result of the outlier that does not reach is determined as the final stop of the effect symbol using the outlier symbol determination data table stored in the ROM 102 (S604). , S616. In the outlier symbol determination data table, numerical data of SR1-1 to SR1-3 is associated with each of the plurality of types of effect symbols.

  In the process of S604, numerical data (random number) is extracted from each of SR1-1 to SR1-3 at a predetermined timing, and a symbol table corresponding to the extracted numerical data is used for the left and the middle, respectively, using the data table for determining the symbol. , It is determined as a combination of stop symbols that result in variable display of the right effect symbols. In this way, when determining a combination of non-reach outliers, if the stop symbol corresponding to the extracted random number coincides with the combination of jackpot symbols accidentally, correction is made to be a combination of outliers (for example, Each stop symbol is determined by correcting the right symbol by shifting it by one symbol). In addition, when the stop symbol corresponding to the extracted random number accidentally reaches the reach symbol, the correction is made so as to be a combination of non-reach outliers (for example, the right symbol is corrected by shifting one symbol) and each stop symbol is corrected. Is determined.

  When it is determined that it is not the non-reach variation pattern in the processing of S602 (when it is determined to be the reach variation pattern), the stop symbol of the effect symbol that constitutes the combination of the reach symbol is determined (S605), and the process proceeds to S616. In the processing of S605, numerical data (random number) is extracted from each of SR1-1 to SR1-3 at a predetermined timing, and a symbol corresponding to the random number extracted from SR1-1 is used by using the falling symbol determination data table. The symbols corresponding to the random numbers that match the value of the counter extracted from SR1-2 are determined as the stop symbols of the middle symbols, which are determined as the stop symbols of the left and right effect symbols forming the reach state. Also in this case, when a combination of big hit symbols happens to occur, each stop symbol is determined by correcting it so that it becomes a combination of outlying symbols (for example, correction by shifting the middle symbol by one symbol).

  Further, when it is not determined to be a deviation in the process of S601 (when it is determined to be a big hit) (N in S601), the effect control CPU 101 determines whether the big hit symbol is in accordance with the type of the big hit. The stop design of the effect design which forms the combination is decided (S603), advances to S616.

  In S603, the combination of winning symbols is determined according to the type of big hit as follows. Based on which of the display result 2 designation command and the display result 3 designation command is stored in the display result specific command storage area, the jackpot type is selected from the probability variation jackpot and the normal jackpot. When it is determined that it is decided to make a probability variation jackpot, numerical data (random number) is extracted from SR1-1 at a predetermined timing, and a combination of SR1-1 and a probability variation jackpot symbol (for example, left, Use the data table (probability variation big hit symbol determination table) in which the relationship between the middle and right is a combination of odd-numbered squares such as "7, 7, 7"), and use one of the probability variation jackpot symbols from the extracted values. The combination of is selected and determined. Further, when it is determined that it is determined to be a normal big hit, numerical data (random number) is extracted from SR1-1 at a predetermined timing, and a combination of SR1-1 and a normal big hit symbol (for example, left, middle, The right is a combination of even numbers such as "4,4,4") and a data table (normal jackpot symbol determination table) in which a relation is set, and a combination of any of the jackpot symbols from the extracted values. Select and decide. The symbol thus determined is used as the final stop symbol which is the variable display result before being controlled to the big hit game state.

  Next, after performing an effect setting process (S616) that performs a process for setting various effects in the variable display, the process proceeds to S617. In the effect setting process, a symbol display pattern or the like is determined based on the type of symbol determined in S603 to S605. At the time of determining the symbol display pattern, depending on whether the current variation display is out of normal variation, is out of shortening variation, involves a reach, or develops into SP reach, etc. The display pattern and display mode of the symbol are determined. It should be noted that these pieces of information may be determined by the variation pattern designation command stored in the command storage area provided in the storage area of the RAM 103.

  In S617, the effect control pattern is determined to be one of a plurality of types of effect control patterns. In S617, the pattern variation control pattern table according to the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command, and various production control (production operation) patterns designated by the production control pattern of the production determined in the processing of S616. Of the plural types of symbol variation control patterns stored in, the production control pattern corresponding to any of the specified various production operation patterns is selected and determined as the use pattern.

  In the control pattern table stored in the ROM 102, for example, the effect display in the period from the start of the fluctuation of the effect symbol determined in the process of S616 to the stop display of the final effect symbol which is the final effect symbol. Data indicating the control content of various effect operations such as effect display operation of effect symbols in the display area of the device 9, effect display operation in reach effect, effect display operation in effect of pseudo-link, and effect display operation in notice effect. Plural types are stored as the pattern variation control patterns.

  Further, each symbol variation control pattern, for example, production control process timer set value, production control process timer judgment value, production display control data, voice control data, lamp control data, and end code, such as display variation display It includes control data for controlling various production operations in accordance with the contents, and the contents of various production controls, the timing of production control switching, and the like are set in time series.

  Next, a process table corresponding to the effect control pattern selected in S617 is selected (S618). Then, the process timer (production setting process timer) in the process data 1 of the selected process table is started (S619).

  After executing the processing of S619, according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1), a rendering device (a rendering display device 9 as a rendering component, a rendering component Control of various lamps and the speaker 27) as a part for production is started (S620). For example, according to the display control execution data, a command is output to the VDP 109 in order to display an image (including the effect symbol) according to the variation pattern on the effect display device 9. In addition, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp driver board 35 in order to perform lighting/extinguishing control of light emitters such as various LEDs. Further, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the sound output board 70 in order to output sound from the speaker 27.

  Then, a value corresponding to the variation time specified by the variation pattern command is set in the variation display time timer (S621), and the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation process (S802). A symbol variation start process is executed (S622). Then, the effect design variation start process ends.

[Other effects]
In the above-described embodiment, the following effects may be executed. For example, a full-screen notice effect may be executed. The full-screen notice effect is a blackout effect in which a cover image such as a darkened image DG is displayed on the entire display screen of the effect display device 9 at the start of variation to make it difficult to visually recognize the display mode of the decorative pattern (effect pattern). It is a notice effect that covers the screen. The covering image is not limited to the dark image DG or the black image, and may be an image of a predetermined color or pattern such as an image of a light emission mode or an image of a freeze mode, and a display pattern of a decorative pattern (particularly It is only necessary that the display content of the decorative pattern is an image that is difficult or invisible. The predetermined notice effect such as the full-screen notice effect may be a panel type (panel display format) step-up notice, cut-in notice, story notice, mini-game notice, development notice, etc. Or it is a notice effect displayed in a part (at least a part where the decorative pattern can be hidden), and at least the decorative pattern (for example, the display form or the display content of the decorative pattern) is completely invisible (transparency is zero). It may be a notice effect that makes it invisible, or a notice effect that makes it difficult to see, such as a display screen or a decorative pattern that is transparent (low transparency).

  With reference to FIG. 17 and FIG. 18, an example of the case where the symbol advance notice effect and the reverse variation in the case of the presence or absence of the full-screen notice effect are displayed will be described. FIG. 17 is a timing chart showing the relationship between the variation of the decorative pattern and each notice effect, etc. In (A), there is no execution of the full screen notice effect, and in (B), there is the execution of the full screen notice effect. .. FIG. 18 shows a performance execution example in the case shown in FIG. 17 in the start period of the super reach variation display. Specifically, FIGS. 18(A), (B1) to (E1) are examples of performance execution in the case of FIG. 17(A), and FIGS. 18(A), (B2) to (E2) are shown in FIG. It is an example of performance execution in the case of B).

  As shown in FIG. 17(A), regarding the variation display of the decorative design, the backward variation of all the decorative patterns is started at the start of the variation (timing T01), and at the end of the backward variation (timing T03). After the change of the decorative pattern in the forward direction is started, it becomes a high-speed change, and thereafter, the change of the left and right decorative patterns is decelerated, and the reach display mode is established (reach is established), and the reach effect is executed. In addition, regarding each notice effect, in FIG. 17A, it is determined that the full-screen notice effect is not executed, and at the timing T01, the reverse direction start display of the decorative symbol and the symbol notice effect are started. . The symbol notice effect ends at timing T02, and the backward fluctuation ends at timing T03. At the end of this backward movement (timing T03), the forward movement of the decorative pattern is started. Looking at the effect execution example at this time, as shown in FIG. 18(A), from the state in which the decorative pattern is confirmed and displayed at the reference position Ref in the previous variable display, as shown in FIG. 18(B1), In the opposite direction (upward direction) opposite to the direction (downward direction), a symbol advance notice effect as shown in FIG. 18(B1), that is, a predetermined color (for example, blue, green) around the decorative pattern is started. , An aura (backlight) image G is displayed. Then, at the end of the reverse direction fluctuation shown in FIG. 17A (timing T03), the reverse fluctuation of the decorative pattern is stopped as shown in FIG. 18C1, and the decoration is changed as shown in FIG. 18D1. The variation of the symbol in the forward direction is started, and the decorative symbol is variably displayed in the forward direction beyond the reference position Ref shown in FIG. 18(E1).

  On the other hand, in FIG. 17B, since it is determined that the full-screen notice effect is executed, the symbol notice effect is changed from the timing T01 as the initial value to the timing T03. Looking at the effect execution example at this time, the full-screen notice effect (blackout effect) is started as shown in FIG. 18(B2) and is included in the full-screen notice effect as shown in FIG. 18(C2). A notification image such as "Chance!" is displayed, and after the end of the full-screen notice effect of Fig. 18(C2), that is, when the forward change of the decorative design is started as shown in Fig. 18(D2), the design The notice production has been changed to start. That is, the start of the symbol notice effect is changed after the end of the full-screen notice effect (blackout effect) shown in FIG. 18(D2), not at the start of the change shown in FIG. 18(B1). As a result, it is possible to prevent the symbol notice effect from being hidden by the full-screen notice effect and being hidden. It should be noted that, although the reverse start display of the decorative pattern is executed without change, since it is hidden behind the full-screen notice effect (blackout effect) shown in (B2) and (C2) of FIG. can not see. Although the notification image shown in FIG. 18C2 is included in the full-screen notification effect, it may be a notification executed separately from the full-screen notification effect, or the notification image may not be displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 18(D2), the design notice production is started before the decorative design reaches the reference position Ref, but the decorative design is returned to the reference position Ref as indicated by the one-dot chain arrow. The symbol notice effect may be executed. The execution period of the symbol notice effect is shorter than the execution period of the backward fluctuation as shown in FIG. 17A, but may be the same as or longer than the execution period of the backward fluctuation. The same is true when the start is changed to timing T03 as shown in FIG. 17B.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 19 and FIG. 20, an example of a case in which the symbol advance notice effect is not executed and the reverse fluctuation is displayed in the presence or absence of the full-screen notice effect will be described. FIG. 19 is a timing chart showing the relationship between the variation of the decorative symbol and each notice effect, etc. In FIG. 19A, in the case where the symbol notice effect and the full-screen notice effect are not executed and the reverse variation is executed, (B). Then, the case where the symbol notice effect is not executed and the reverse variation with the full-screen notice effect is executed is shown. FIG. 20 shows an example of effect production in the case shown in FIG. 19 during the start period of the super reach variation display. Specifically, FIGS. 20(A), (B1), (C1), (D), and (E) are performance execution examples in the case of FIG. 19(A), FIGS. 20(A), (B2), ( C2), (D), and (E) are examples of effect execution in the case of FIG. 19(B).

  The variable display of the decorative pattern shown in FIG. 19A is the same as that in FIG. Further, regarding each notice effect, etc., in FIG. 19(A), execution of the full-screen notice effect and the design notice effect is determined not to be performed, and at the timing T01, the reverse direction start display of the decorative symbol is started, and the reverse direction is displayed. The direction change ends at timing T03. At the end of this backward movement (timing T03), the forward movement of the decorative pattern is started. Looking at the effect execution example at this time, as shown in FIG. 20(A), from the state in which the decorative pattern is fixedly displayed at the reference position Ref in the previous variable display, as shown in FIG. A reverse (upward) fluctuation opposite to the direction (downward) is started, and at the end of the reverse fluctuation (timing T03) shown in FIG. 19(A), as shown in FIG. 20(C1) The reverse variation of the design is stopped, and the variation of the decorative design is started in the forward direction as shown in FIG. 20(D1), and the decorative design is displayed in the forward direction beyond the reference position Ref shown in FIG. 20(E1). Will be done.

  On the other hand, in FIG. 19B, it is determined that the symbol advance notice effect is not executed, the full-screen notice effect and the reverse direction change are performed, and the full-screen notice effect and the reverse direction change are performed. Starts at the start of fluctuation (timing T01) and ends at timing T03. At the end of this backward movement (timing T03), the forward movement of the decorative pattern is started. Looking at the performance execution example at this time, the full-screen notice effect (blackout effect) is started as shown in FIG. 20(B2) and is included in the full-screen notice effect as shown in FIG. 20(C2). A notification image such as “Chance!” is displayed, and after the end of the full-screen notice effect of FIG. 20(C2), that is, as shown in FIG. 20(D), the forward movement of the decorative pattern is started. Although the reverse direction start display of the decorative pattern is executed, since it is hidden behind the full-screen notice effect (blackout effect) shown in (B2) and (C2) of FIG. I can't see the fluctuation. Although the notification image shown in FIG. 20(C2) is included in the full-screen preview effect, the notification image may be executed separately from the full-screen preview effect, or the notification image may not be displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 20D, the variable display in the forward direction can be visually recognized before the decorative pattern reaches the reference position Ref. The variable display in the forward direction from the returned state may be visible.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 21 and FIG. 22, an example of the case where the backward notice variation is not executed and the symbol notice effect is performed in the case of the presence or absence of the full-screen notice effect will be described. FIG. 21 is a timing chart showing the relationship between the variation of the decorative pattern and each notice effect, etc. In (A), there is no execution of the reverse direction variation with the full-screen notice effect, and there is no execution of the backward direction variation in (B). , Shows the case where there is execution of the full-screen notice effect and the pattern notice effect. FIG. 22 shows an example of the effect execution in the case shown in FIG. 21 in the start period of the super reach variation display. Specifically, FIGS. 22(A) and (B1) are examples of effect execution in the case of FIG. 21(A), and FIGS. 22(A), (B2), (C2), and (D2) are shown in FIG. It is an example of performance execution in the case of B).

  The variable display of the decorative design shown in FIG. 21(A) is the same as that in FIG. 17(A) described above, and therefore the description thereof is omitted here. Further, regarding each notice effect, etc., in FIG. 21(A), it is determined that the full-screen notice effect and the variation in the backward direction of the decorative pattern are not executed, and the symbol notice effect at the start of the change (timing T01). Is started. The symbol notice effect ends at the subsequent timing T02. It should be noted that the change in the decorative pattern in the forward direction is also started at the start of the change (timing T01). Looking at the effect execution example at this time, as shown in FIG. 22(A), from the state in which the decorative pattern is fixedly displayed at the reference position Ref in the previous variable display, as shown in FIG. 22(B1), As the fluctuation in the direction (downward) is started, a symbol notice effect as shown in FIG. 22(B1), that is, an aura of a predetermined color (for example, blue, green, red, etc.) around the decorative symbol (rear) The notice effect in which the image G of (light) is displayed is also started.

  On the other hand, in FIG. 21(B), since it is determined that the symbol notice effect and the full-screen notice effect are executed, the symbol notice effect is changed from the timing T01 as the initial value to the timing T03. Looking at the effect execution example at this time, the full-screen notice effect (blackout effect) is started as shown in FIG. 22(B2) and is included in the full-screen notice effect as shown in FIG. 22(C2). A notification image such as “chance!” is displayed, and after the end of the full-screen notice effect of FIG. 22(C2), that is, when the forward direction variation of the decorative pattern is started as shown in FIG. 22(D2) The notice production has been changed to start. That is, the start of the symbol notice effect is changed after the end of the full-screen notice effect (blackout effect) shown in FIG. 22(D2), not at the start of the fluctuation shown in FIG. 22(B1). As a result, it is possible to prevent the symbol notice effect from being hidden by the full-screen notice effect and being hidden. As shown in FIG. 21(B), it is determined that the symbol notice effect and the full-screen notice effect are executed, and it is determined that the decorative pattern is not changed in the opposite direction. Therefore, FIG. During the execution period of the full-screen notice effect (blackout effect) shown in C2), swinging of the decorative pattern is executed as shown in FIG. 21B, but it is hidden behind the full-screen notice effect. Therefore, the swing of the decorative pattern cannot be seen by the player. The start of variation in the decorative pattern in the forward direction is changed after the end of the execution period of all the symbol notice effects. The notification image shown in FIG. 22(C2) is included in the full-screen preview effect, but the notification image may be executed separately from the full-screen preview effect, or the notification image may not be displayed.

(1) In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine of the present invention is
A gaming machine capable of playing a game (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like),
Variable display means (for example, effect display device 9 or the like) for displaying the identification information (for example, decorative pattern) in a predetermined direction in a variable manner,
A notice effect executing means (for example, CPU 101 for effect control) capable of executing a predetermined notice effect (for example, a notice effect for all screens);
Equipped with
The predetermined notice effect is executed so that the display mode of the identification information becomes invisible or difficult to visually recognize at the start of variable display (for example, in FIG. 18(B2), FIG. 20(B2) or FIG. 22(B2). (A blackout effect such as the decorative pattern shown is invisible),
When the predetermined notice effect is executed, the identification information can start the variable display in the predetermined direction after the execution period of the predetermined notice effect has elapsed (for example, FIG. 18(B2), FIG. As shown in FIG. 18(D2), (E2), FIG. 20(D), (E) or FIG. 22(D2) after the execution period of the blackout effect shown in 20(B2) or 22(B2) has elapsed. Decorative pattern starts to move in the forward direction).

  With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the start of movement of the identification information from becoming difficult to understand, and it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1) above,
The predetermined direction may be a normal direction (for example, a decorative pattern forward direction as shown in FIGS. 18(D1), (D2), (E1), and (E2)).

  With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the start of movement of the identification information from becoming difficult to understand.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above,
The predetermined notice effect is an effect that suggests the degree of expectation of being in an advantageous state, and is an effect that is executed in a mode of hiding a part or the whole of the identification information (for example, the full-screen notice effect is more than the case of the outlier). Also, in the case of a big hit, it is easier to display, and it is an effect of hiding the entire decorative pattern (see FIG. 18B2), for example.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the start of movement of the identification information from becoming difficult to understand.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above,
The variable display means can variably display the identification information in a specific direction (for example, a reverse direction) different from the predetermined direction (for example, shown in FIGS. 18B1 and 20B1). Thus, the decorative pattern is variably displayed in the reverse direction different from the forward direction), and so on.

  According to such a configuration, the direction of the variable display is diversified, and the interest of the game can be improved.

(5) In the gaming machine of (4) above,
The change display means changes and displays the identification information in the specific direction at least during the execution period of the predetermined notice effect (for example, at least during the execution period of the full-screen notice effect as shown in FIG. 17B). , The decorative pattern is variably displayed in the opposite direction, etc.).

  According to such a configuration, the identification information can be variably displayed in the specific direction and then variably displayed in the predetermined direction different from the specific direction, and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

(6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5) above,
The identification information notice can be executed at the start of the variable display in the predetermined direction (for example, the effect control CPU 101 can execute the symbol notice effect as shown in FIGS. 18(B1) and 22(B1). Etc.)

  With such a configuration, the interest of the game can be improved by executing the identification information notice.

(7) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (6) above,
When the identification information notice and the predetermined notice effect are executed, the identification information notice is executed after completion of the predetermined notice effect (for example, full screen notice shown in FIG. 18(C2), FIG. 22(C2)). After the effect is finished, the symbol notice effect is executed as shown in FIG. 18(D2) and FIG. 22(D2), for example.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the identification information notice and the predetermined notice effect from being executed simultaneously at the same time, and it is possible to prevent the identification information notice from being invisible or difficult to see due to the predetermined notice effect. It can be prevented.

Next, main effects obtained by the above-described embodiment will be described.
(1) As shown in FIG. 13, the size of the numbers displayed in the second display pattern is different from the size of the numbers displayed in the first display pattern. For example, the size of the numbers displayed when the fluctuation starts and when the fluctuation stops displayed by the second display pattern has a smaller display range than the size of the changing numbers displayed by the first display pattern. In this way, when the fluctuation starts or stops, the player can be made to pay attention to the display mode consisting of numbers and characters, and during the fluctuation display, only the numbers are displayed in a display range larger than when the fluctuation stops. By performing the variable display, it is possible to easily recognize the transition of the effect design during the variable display, and it is possible to suitably display the numbers and the characters.

  (2) There is a correspondence between numbers and characters as shown in FIG. 12, and as shown in FIG. 13, variable display is stopped in a pattern for displaying characters according to numbers. In this way, different characters will appear according to the numbers, so that the numbers and the characters can be displayed appropriately.

  (3) As shown in FIG. 13, an effect of stopping the variable display is executed by a pattern in which the character is displayed larger than the number by moving the number downward as a symbol action at the time of fluctuation stop. In this way, the display mode when displaying numbers and characters can be made interesting, and numbers and characters can be displayed appropriately.

  (4) As shown in FIG. 15, since the character moves greatly as an action during reach formation, the movement of the character can be noticed, and the numbers and characters can be displayed appropriately.

  (5) As shown in FIG. 14, a first change effect of changing only numbers from numbers to characters is executed as an action at fluctuation stop, and a second change effect is performed from numbers and characters to only numbers as an action at fluctuation start. Execute change production. The execution modes are different between the first change effect and the second change effect. In the variable stop pattern action executed as the first change effect, the character jumps forward from the depth direction when the screen of the effect display device 9 is viewed from the front, the number moves downward, and the character is more important than the number. In the variation start symbol action that is displayed in a large size and is executed as the second change effect, the characters are erased from the numbers and the characters, and only the numbers displayed larger than before the change fluctuate downward. By doing so, it is possible to preferably display the numbers and the characters.

  (6) As shown in FIG. 15, at the end of SP reach, the symbols are aligned only with the numbers, and when the fixed background is displayed after returning to the normal background, the determination operation is performed with the numbers and the characters. By doing so, it is possible to provide a display mode of the effect design suitable for each scene of the effect, and it is possible to suitably display the numbers and the characters.

  (7) As shown in FIG. 13, when the variable display is stopped, the display is performed to make the character appear wider than the display range of the numbers before the stop. By doing so, it is possible to reduce a feeling of strangeness when the first display pattern is changed to the second display pattern. Therefore, it is possible to preferably display the numbers and the characters.

  (8) As shown in FIGS. 13D and 13E, as a variation stop symbol action, the character is displayed so as to jump forward from the depth direction when the screen of the effect display device 9 is viewed from the front. The performance is executed. By doing so, a powerful display using the character can be performed.

  (9) As shown in FIG. 15, as the small symbol action pattern B, an effect of violently moving the small symbol in accordance with the effect sound during SP reach is executed. By doing so, it is possible to preferably display the numbers as the small symbols reduced and displayed.

Next, modifications and characteristic points of the embodiment described above will be listed below.
(1) In the above-described embodiment, the probability variation big hit state and the normal big hit state are provided. Further, as the effect design, odd design corresponding to the probability variation big hit, even design corresponding to normal big hit. Here, only the numbers corresponding to the probability variation big hits may be displayed in the second display pattern. For example, only the numbers corresponding to the probability big hit may be displayed with numbers and characters, and the numbers corresponding to the normal big hit may be displayed without displaying the characters. By doing so, it is possible to give a special feeling to the odd number pattern corresponding to the probability variation big hit, and to give a special impression to the odd number symbol having a high advantage. Of the odd-numbered symbols, only the “3” symbol or the “7” symbol may be the probability variation symbol, and the number of symbols displayed in the second display pattern can be appropriately changed.

  (2) In the above-described embodiment, the time saving state (high base state) is maintained until the variable display reaches 100 rotations after the end of the big hit. In such a time saving state, the fluctuation may be started only by the numeral and stopped by only the numeral. In the time saving state, the fluctuation time is shorter than in the normal state, so when a character with movement is displayed, displaying and deleting the character makes the movement of the symbol busy, resulting in a strange appearance. Therefore, the variable display may be difficult to see. Therefore, in the time saving state, the variable display may be executed by the first display pattern of only numbers unlike the normal state. With this configuration, it is possible to preferably display the numbers in the time saving state.

  (3) In the above-described embodiment, when the number display mode is different between the first display pattern that is displayed only with numbers and the second display pattern that is displayed with numbers and characters, the size of the numbers is different. Explained. However, when the display mode of the numbers is different, the position of the numbers, the color of the numbers, the type of the numbers, etc. may be used instead of the size of the numbers, and any two or more combinations may be used. Good. Also, the display mode of the numbers may be different depending on the jackpot expectation.

  (4) In the above-described embodiment, the case where the small symbol is displayed in the corner of the screen of the effect display device 9 is shown. However, one of the reachable small symbols may be displayed in the upper left corner of the screen and the other in the upper right corner of the screen. Further, as the small symbol action pattern, the case where the small symbol is moved up and down has been described. The movement of the small pattern is not limited to these, and the pattern may be shaken in accordance with music, rotated laterally, or bounced like a dance. Further, an effect image (for example, a flame image) may be added around the small symbol.

  (5) In the above-described embodiment, the effect of stopping the variable display is executed by the pattern in which the character is displayed larger than the number by moving the number downward as the symbol action at the time of the variable stop. However, as the symbol action when the fluctuation is stopped, the number may be moved diagonally instead of moving it downward. Specifically, when the variable display is stopped, the left symbol may be moved diagonally right, the middle symbol may be moved right below, and the right symbol may be diagonally moved left. In this way, the numerical symbols that are displayed small when the fluctuation is stopped are displayed so as to be gathered in the center, which is good-looking. The movement of the symbol action when the fluctuation is stopped is not limited to these, and may be moved in any direction.

  (6) In the above-described embodiment, the numbers and the characters have a one-to-one correspondence. However, the numbers and the characters do not have to have a one-to-one correspondence. For example, the same character may correspond to a plurality of numbers, or the corresponding character may change depending on the background. Further, when the prefetching notice is executed, the variable display may be changed to a special stage for a plurality of variable displays until the variable display of the target to be prefetched is executed. In this case, special numbers or characters that are not normally displayed may be displayed. Further, it is desirable that the display pattern of the numbers and characters at this time be different from that in the normal time. In addition, you may make it provide the stage in which a variable display is performed only with a number.

  (7) In the above-described embodiment, during the variable display, the symbols are changed only by the numbers so that the player can recognize whether or not the variable display is being performed. It is desirable that the numbers displayed during such variable display are displayed in a lighter color than the display mode at the start of the change and at the time of the stop of the change. In this way, by making the density similar to that at the start of fluctuation, it is possible to prevent the effect executed in the background from becoming difficult to visually recognize. By displaying only numbers rather than numbers and characters, it is possible to reduce the display area of the symbols, showing that the symbols are fluctuating, and reducing the obstacles to other notices. can do.

  (8) In the above-described embodiment, the symbol in the reach may be the same as the symbol shown in the first display pattern during variable display, or is a symbol different from the symbol shown in the first display pattern. You may.

  (9) In the above-described embodiment, the first effect of changing only numbers from numbers to characters is executed as the action at the time of fluctuation stop, and the second change is performed from the numbers and characters to only numbers as the action at the time of fluctuation start. The case of executing the performance has been described. Although the character operated when the change effect was executed, another effect image may be added. Some changes may be made to the display mode.

  (10) In the above-described embodiment, as the symbol action at the time of fluctuation stop, the stopped numbers may be temporarily displayed in an enlarged manner in the front and then reduced. Then, the character may be made to appear behind the enlarged number. In this way, the characters are displayed as if they were suddenly displayed in a large display mode from the back of the enlarged numbers, which makes it possible to display the characters with more power and to surprise the player. it can.

  (11) In the above-described embodiment, a plurality of types of SP reach may be provided. The small symbol action may be different depending on the type of SP reach.

  (12) In the above-described embodiment, one character is displayed for one number. However, an image other than a character may be added to one number. For example, as the variable stop action, an image indicating that the hold display changes together with the character when the number stops (an image indicating that the hold display changes with high jackpot expectation) may be displayed. . By doing this, it is possible to draw attention to the action at the time of fluctuation stop. Then, it is possible to give a pre-reading notice that the hold display is changed by displaying the image.

  (13) In the above-described embodiment, the jackpot gaming state has been described as a typical example as an advantageous state advantageous to the player. However, not limited to this, the advantageous state advantageous to the player may include a high probability state (probability change state), a time saving state, and another advantageous state such as a high base state.

  (14) In the above-described embodiment, the effect control board 80, the sound output board 70, and the lamp driver board 35 are provided as the boards on which the circuits for controlling the effect device are mounted. May be mounted on one substrate. Furthermore, a first effect control board (display control board) having a circuit for controlling the effect display device 9 and the like, and a circuit for controlling other effect devices (lamps, LEDs, speakers 27R, 27L, etc.) are installed. You may make it provide two boards, such as the second effect control board.

  (15) In the above-described embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 directly sends a command to the effect control microcomputer 100, but the game control microcomputer 560 may use another board (for example, the figure 3 is a sound output board 70, a lamp driver board 35, or the like, or a sound/lamp board having a function of a circuit mounted on the sound output board 70 and a function of a circuit mounted on the lamp driver board 35). The effect control command may be transmitted and transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 in the effect control board 80 via another board. In that case, the command may simply be passed on another board, or control means such as a microcomputer may be mounted on the voice output board 70, the lamp driver board 35, and the sound/lamp board so that the control means receives the command. According to what is done, control related to voice control and lamp control is executed, and the received command is changed as it is or is changed to, for example, a simplified command, and the effect control microcomputer 100 controls the effect display device 9. It may be transmitted to. Even in that case, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs the display control according to the effect control command directly received from the game control microcomputer 560 in the above-described embodiment, similarly to the sound output board 70 and the lamp driver. Display control can be performed in response to commands received from the board 35 or the sound/lamp board. In the case of such a configuration, various kinds of determinations made by the effect control microcomputer 100 in the above-described embodiment may be similarly performed by the effect control microcomputer 100, or a voice output may be performed. It may be performed by the control means such as the board 70, the lamp driver board 35, or the microcomputer mounted on the sound/lamp board.

  (16) In the above-described embodiment, in order to notify the production control microcomputer of the variation pattern indicating the variation time and the variation mode such as the type of reach production and the presence/absence of pseudo-relation, one variation is set at the start of variation. Although the example of transmitting the variation pattern command is shown, the variation pattern may be notified to the effect control microcomputer by two or more commands. Specifically, in the case of notifying by two commands, the game control microcomputer determines whether or not there is a pseudo-relation with the first command, whether or not there is a sliding effect, and the like (before the reach, the so-called second A command indicating the change time and change mode before (before stop) is transmitted, and the second command indicates the type of reach and the presence/absence of re-lottery production, etc., after the reach (so-called second stop if not reached). It is also possible to transmit a command indicating the variation time or variation mode of (after). In this case, the effect control microcomputer may perform effect control in the variable display based on the variable time derived from the combination of the two commands. It should be noted that the game control microcomputer notifies each of the two commands of the variation time, and the effect control microcomputer selects the specific variation mode executed at each timing. Good. When sending two commands, two commands may be sent within the same timer interrupt, and after a predetermined period has elapsed after sending the first command (for example, the next timer interrupt). (In) the second command may be transmitted. It should be noted that the variation mode indicated by each command is not limited to this example, and the transmission order can be changed as appropriate. By thus notifying the variation pattern by using two or more commands, it is possible to reduce the amount of data that must be stored as the variation pattern command. As described above, in the configuration in which the variation pattern is notified to the effect control microcomputer by two commands, in the second command after the first command is transmitted, the determination result of the display result by the winning effect process, Alternatively, the prefetching announcement information may be executed based on the transmission of the prefetching determination information such as the variation pattern type and the reception of the second command. Here, the pseudo-relation is an effect display that is shown as if one change that originally corresponds to one reserved storage but a plurality of changes that correspond to a plurality of reserved storages are continuously performed. Abbreviation for continuous variation. In addition, the term “slip” refers to an effect display in which the symbol is slid from the predicted stop position immediately before the symbol stops in the variable display.

  (17) The above-described embodiment can be applied to a device such as a game machine that simulates the operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The programs and data for realizing the above-described embodiments are not limited to the form distributed and provided to a computer device or the like by a removable recording medium, and a storage device included in the computer device or the like in advance. It may be distributed by pre-installed in. Further, the program and data for implementing the present invention may be distributed by being downloaded from another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter. The game embodiment can be executed not only by mounting a removable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. Alternatively, the hardware resources of other devices may be directly used on the network connected via a communication line. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

  (18) As the present embodiment, the gaming machine that pays out the game medium to the player's hand in accordance with the occurrence of the winning prize has been described. An enclosed game machine that adds game points (scores) without paying it out may be adopted. The enclosed game machine has a circulation path that circulates a plurality of balls, which is an example of a game medium, inside the game machine, and is provided with a storage unit that stores the game points. The game points are added to the storage unit, the game points are subtracted from the storage unit according to the ball firing operation, and the game points are added to the storage unit according to the occurrence of a prize.

  (19) In the above-described embodiment, for example, a case where a plurality of types of special symbols or effect symbols “1” to “9” are variably displayed and the display result is derived and displayed is shown. It is not limited to the mode. For example, the symbols that are variably displayed and the symbols that are derived and displayed do not necessarily have to be the same, and symbols that are different from the symbols that are variably displayed may be derived and displayed. Further, it is not always necessary to variably display a plurality of types of symbols, and variable display may be performed using only one type of symbol. In this case, for example, the variable display may be executed by alternately lighting and blinking the one type of symbol display. And, even in this case, one kind of symbol used for the variable display may be derived and displayed at the end, or a symbol different from the one kind of symbol may be finally derived and displayed. It may be one.

  (20) In the above-described embodiment, the “ratio (ratio, probability)” has been described with a specific example of a predetermined value exceeding 0%. However, the “ratio (ratio, probability)” may be 0%. For example, in the case where "the occurrence ratio of one is higher than the occurrence ratio of the other" by comparing the occurrence ratio of the predetermined game state 1 with the occurrence ratio of the other game state 2 in the predetermined game period, It also includes the case where the rate of occurrence of one game state is 0%.

  (21) In the above-described embodiment, after the variation display result when the display result of the variation display is determined to be the probability variation big hit is derived and displayed, and after the jackpot game state ends, the condition is changed to the probability variation state unconditionally. An example of controlled stochastic state control is given. However, not limited to this, when the detection means detects that the game ball has passed a specific area provided in the special winning opening of the special variable winning ball device 20, the probability variation determining device is controlled to the probability variation state. A type of probabilistic state control may be performed.

  (22) It should be considered that the embodiment disclosed this time is an example in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown not by the above description but by the claims, and is intended to include meanings equivalent to the claims and all modifications within the scope.

  The present invention is not limited to what has been described above. Further, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if there are changes and additions within the scope not departing from the gist of the present invention, in addition to the above-described embodiment and other examples of the embodiments described later.

  In addition, all or a part of the configurations shown in the above-described embodiment and each modified example and the configurations shown in the later-described exemplary embodiment and each modified example may be arbitrarily combined.

  In addition, it should be considered that the above-described embodiment and the below-described embodiment disclosed this time are exemplifications in all points and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown not by the above description and the following description but by the claims, and is intended to include meanings equivalent to the claims and all modifications within the scope.

  As the gaming machine of the present invention, in addition, a variable display (variable display, etc.) of identification information (symbol information, symbol, etc.) is performed, and the game can be controlled to an advantageous state (big hit game state, etc.) advantageous to the player. A machine (pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like), which is provided with variable display means (effect display device 9, effect control microcomputer 100, etc.) capable of executing variable display of identification information, and the identification information (symbol information etc.) A first display that includes first information (numerical information, numbers, etc.) and second information (decoration information, characters, etc.), and displays the first information without displaying the second information in the display pattern of the identification information. A pattern (a pattern or the like displayed by numbers) and a second display pattern (a pattern or the like displayed by numbers and characters) for displaying the first information and the second information are provided, and the variable display means identifies After the information starts to fluctuate in a predetermined direction (downward direction, etc.), the fluctuating display is executed by the first display pattern (the fluctuating display is executed by a numeral, etc.) and the fluctuating display is stopped by the second display pattern. (For example, changing display is stopped by numbers and characters), the first information when displayed in the first display pattern and the first information when displayed in the second display pattern , The display mode is different (as shown in FIG. 13, the number when displayed with only numbers is displayed larger than the number when displayed with numbers and characters, etc.). Etc.) and a predetermined display (timer display, etc.) and a specific mode (timer display: "0" display mode and the like) predetermined display means (production control microcomputer 90100, production symbol changing process in FIG. 36, S90922 and S90934 in FIG. 43), and the predetermined display is the specific mode. When (when the timer display becomes "0", etc.), one of the specific effects (a high-expectation expectation suggestion display or a low-expectation expectation suggestion display) (FIG. 38 (B), (C)) specific effect executing means (effect control microcomputer 90100, effect symbol changing processing etc. in FIG. 36) and based on the detection result of the operation detecting means, Action-responsive effect means (effect control microcomputer 90100) capable of executing an action-enabled effect (operation-enabled effect of FIGS. 38 and 39) corresponding to the player's operation. , Process during production symbol variation in FIG. 36, S90927, S90929, etc. in FIG. 43), the predetermined display means, the predetermined display when the first period (such as 25 seconds in FIG. 38B) has elapsed. When the first display (the display of the first effect in FIG. 38(B) or the like) or the second period (60 seconds in FIG. 38(C)) longer than the first period has elapsed It is possible to perform a second display (such as a display of the third effect in FIG. 38C) in which the predetermined display is the specific mode, and during the second period rather than during the first period. , The effect is controlled so that the rate at which the action corresponding effect is executed becomes high (as in FIGS. 40(C) to (E), the first effect having a shorter timer period in the third effect having a longer timer period). Compared with the above, the ratio of executing operation effects is set to be high, the total number of operations is set to be large, and the number of operations per unit time is set to be large).

  With such a configuration, it is possible to preferably display the first identification information and the second identification information. Further, it is possible to reduce the boring of the player in the presentation.

  In the above gaming machine, the identification information of the second display pattern may be displayed when the predetermined display becomes the specific mode. With such a configuration, it is possible to make more attention to the fact that the predetermined display is in the specific mode. Further, the identification information may be displayed by the second display pattern at a higher rate when the second display is performed than when the first display is performed. With such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to the predetermined display mode.

  Further, a predetermined game is given as an example of the form of the gaming machine, which can suitably display the first identification information and the second identification information and can reduce the boredom of the player in the production. A game machine (pachinko game machine 901 or the like) to be executed, which is capable of detecting a motion (operation or the like) by the player (push sensor 90124, tilt direction sensor unit 90123 or the like), and a predetermined display (timer in FIG. 39). Displaying) performs a predetermined operation (clocking operation, etc.) and performs a specific mode (timer display is “0” display mode, etc.) in a predetermined display means (production control microcomputer 90100, production symbol changing process in FIG. 36). , S90922, S90934, etc. in FIG. 43) and when the predetermined display is in the specific mode (when the timer display is “0”, etc.), a plurality of types of specific effects (high degree of expectation suggestion) Of the display or the low degree of expectation suggestion display, etc.), a specific effect execution means (effect control microcomputer 90100, FIG. 36) capable of executing any of the specific effects (FIGS. 38(B) and (C)). Based on the effect symbol changing process) and the detection result of the operation detecting means, the action corresponding effect means (action corresponding effect of FIG. 38 and FIG. 39) capable of executing the action corresponding effect corresponding to the operation of the player ( The production control microcomputer 90100, the production symbol variation process of FIG. 36, S90927 of FIG. 43, S90929, and the like) are provided, and the predetermined display means has passed the first period (25 seconds of FIG. 38B). When the predetermined display is the specific mode, the first display (the display of the first effect in FIG. 38(B) or the like) or the second period longer than the first period (60 in FIG. 38C). It is possible to display a second display (such as a display of the third effect in FIG. 38C) in which the predetermined display is the specific mode when (seconds) has elapsed, and the predetermined display is the second display rather than during the first period. During the two periods, the effect is controlled so that the ratio at which the action corresponding effect is executed is higher (as in the case of (C) to (E) of FIG. 40, the third effect has a longer timer. Compared with the first effect having a short period, the ratio of executing the operation effect is set to be high, the total number of operations is set to be large, and the number of operations per unit time is set to be large. A game machine is mentioned. Hereinafter, an example of a form example of this gaming machine will be described as another form example.

(Other form examples)
Hereinafter, another embodiment will be described with reference to the drawings. Note that this other form example may be referred to as an “embodiment”.

[Other First Embodiment]
Hereinafter, another embodiment will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of a pachinko gaming machine 901, which is an example of a gaming machine, will be described. FIG. 23 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 901 as seen from the front. FIG. 24 is a hit type table.

  The pachinko gaming machine 901 is a gaming machine in which a game is played by hitting a game ball as a game medium in the game area 907. The pachinko gaming machine 901 includes an outer frame (not shown) formed in a vertically long rectangular shape, and a game frame attached to the inside of the outer frame so as to be openable and closable. In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 901 has a frame-shaped glass door frame 902 that is openably and closably provided in the game frame. The game frame is a front frame (not shown) installed to be openable and closable with respect to the outer frame, a mechanism plate (not shown) to which mechanical parts and the like are attached, and various parts attached to them (game to be described later). (Excluding the board 906). In the pachinko game machine 901, a game is played by hitting a game ball as a game medium in the game area.

  On the lower surface of the glass door frame 902, there is a hit ball supply plate (upper plate) 903. Below the hitting ball supply plate 903, a surplus ball receiving tray 904 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hitting ball supply plate 903, a hitting ball operation handle (operation knob) 905 for firing a hit ball, and the like are provided. A game board 906 is detachably attached to the back surface of the glass door frame 902. The game board 906 is a structure including a plate-shaped body that constitutes the game board 906 and various parts attached to the plate-shaped body. Further, on the front surface of the game board 906, a game area 907 in which the driven game balls can flow down is formed.

  A member forming the surplus ball receiving tray (lower tray) 904 is configured in a stick shape (bar shape) at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the lower tray body (for example, a central portion of the lower tray) or the like, and is formed by a player. A stick controller 90122 that can be gripped and tilted in a plurality of directions (front, rear, left and right) is attached. It should be noted that the stick controller 90122 has a predetermined operation by a push/pull operation with a predetermined operation finger (for example, an index finger) while the player holds the operation rod of the stick controller 90122 with an operation hand (for example, left hand). A trigger button 90125 (see FIG. 25) capable of instructing operation is provided, and a trigger sensor 90121 (FIG. 25) for detecting a predetermined instructing operation such as push-pull operation on the trigger button 90125 is provided inside the operating rod of the stick controller 90122. (See) is built in. Further, a tilt direction sensor unit 90123 (see FIG. 25) for detecting a tilting operation with respect to the operating rod is provided inside the main body of the lower plate and the like below the stick controller 90122. Further, the stick controller 90122 includes a vibrator motor 90126 (see FIG. 25) for vibrating the stick controller 90122.

  The member forming the hitting ball supply plate (upper plate) 903 is, for example, at a predetermined position on the upper side of the upper plate body (for example, above the stick controller 90122) or the like, and the player performs a predetermined instruction operation by pressing or the like. A possible push button 90120 is provided. The push button 90120 may be configured to be capable of mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically detecting a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation by the player. A push sensor 90124 (see FIG. 25) may be provided inside the main body of the upper plate at the installation position of the push button 90120 or the like to detect an operation action of the player performed on the push button 90120. In the configuration example shown in FIG. 23, the attachment positions of the push button 90120 and the stick controller 90122 have a vertical positional relationship in the central portion of the upper plate and the lower plate. On the other hand, the push button 90120 and the stick controller 90122 may be attached to the left side or the right side of the upper plate and the lower plate while maintaining the vertical positional relationship. Alternatively, the push button 90120 and the stick controller 90122 may not be attached at a vertical position, but may be at a horizontal position. As the operating means, a lever switch and other operating means such as a jog dial may be provided.

  In the vicinity of the center of the game area 907, an effect display device 909 is provided as a first display unit capable of variably displaying (also referred to as variable display) effect symbols as a plurality of types of identification information capable of identifying each. On the right side of the effect display device 909 in the game area 907, a first special symbol display (first variable display portion) 908a that variably displays the first special symbol as a plurality of types of identification information that can identify each, A second special symbol display (second variation display portion) 908b that variably displays the second special symbol as a plurality of types of identification information that can identify each is provided.

  Each of the first special symbol display device 908a and the second special symbol display device 908b is composed of a simple and small-sized display device (for example, a 7-segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers and characters. The effect display device 909 is composed of a liquid crystal display device (LCD), and on the display screen, an effect symbol display area for performing variable display of effect symbols in synchronization with the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is provided. To be In the effect symbol display area, for example, a symbol display area in which three decorative (for effect) effect symbols for left, middle, and right are variably displayed is formed.

  Hereinafter, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a special symbol, and the first special symbol indicator 908a and the second special symbol indicator 908b are collectively referred to as a special symbol indicator (variable display section). I have something to do.

  In addition, in this embodiment, although the case where two special symbol display devices 908a and 908b are provided is shown, the gaming machine may be provided with only one special symbol display device.

  Each of the first special symbol display 908a and the second special symbol display 908b is controlled by the game control microcomputer mounted on the main board (game control board). The effect display device 909 is controlled by the effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board. When the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed on the first special symbol display 908a, the effect display is executed on the effect display device 909 along with the variable display, and the second special symbol display 908b is used. When the variable display of the 2 special symbols is being executed, the effect display is executed on the effect display device 909 along with the variable display, so that the progress of the game can be easily grasped.

  More specifically, the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the first starting condition or the second starting condition that is the execution condition of the variable display is satisfied (for example, the game ball is the first starting winning opening 9013). Or after passing through the second starting winning opening 9014 (including winning)), the start condition of the variable display (for example, when the number of reserved memory is not 0, the variation of the first special symbol and the second special symbol) Display is not being executed, and started based on the fact that the jackpot game is not being executed), and when the variable display time (variable time) has elapsed, the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. To do. It should be noted that passing a game ball means that the game ball has passed through a predetermined winning area, such as a winning opening or a gate, and includes a concept that the gaming ball has entered (winning) the winning opening. Is. Derivative display of the display result means that the symbol (an example of identification information) is finally stopped and displayed.

  When the big hit display result (big hit pattern) as the specific display result is displayed on the first special symbol display device 908a, or the big hit display result (big hit pattern) is displayed as the specific display result on the second special symbol display device 908b. When the display is derived, the big hit display result (combination of big hit symbols) as the specific display result is also displayed on the effect display device 909. In this way, when the specific display result is displayed as the display result of the variable display, it is controlled to a specific game state (big hit game state) as an advantageous state in which a value advantageous to the player (advantageous value) is given.

  Further, in the effect display device 909, the symbols other than the symbol that is the final stop symbol (for example, the middle symbol in the left and right middle symbols) continue for a predetermined time, and the jackpot symbol (for example, the symbols in the left, middle, and right are arranged in the same symbol). The combination of symbols) is stopped, oscillating, enlarged or reduced or deformed in a state of being in agreement, or a plurality of symbols are displayed in a variable manner in synchronization with each other, or the positions of the displayed symbols are exchanged. Then, the production performed in a state in which the possibility of a big hit continues before the final result is displayed (hereinafter, these states are referred to as reach states) is referred to as reach production.

  Here, in the reach state, when the effect symbols stopped and displayed in the display area of the effect display device 909 constitute a part of the big hit combination, the variable display of the effect symbols that are not yet stopped and displayed continues. It is a display state or a display state in which all or part of the effect symbols are variably displayed in synchronization while forming all or part of the big hit combination. In other words, the reach means a state in which the identification information constitutes the specific display result in the plurality of variable display areas, but at least a part of the variable display areas is in the variable display. In this embodiment, the reach state is formed, for example, in a state where the same symbol is stopped in the left and right symbol display areas and the symbol is not stopped in the middle symbol display area. The symbols stopped in the left and right symbol display areas when the reach state is formed are called reach formation symbols or reach symbols.

  The display effect in the reach state is the reach effect display (reach effect). In addition, at the time of reach, an effect different from usual may be given by a lamp or a sound. This production is called reach production. In addition, at the time of reach, a character (an effect display imitating a person or the like and different from a design (effect design etc.)) is displayed, or a background image of the effect display device 9 is displayed (for example, color or the like). ) May be changed. The display of the character and the change of the display mode of the background are referred to as reach effect display. In addition, some of the reach are set so that a big hit is more likely to occur when it appears than in a normal reach. Such a special reach is called super reach.

  Below the effect display device 909, a winning device having a first starting winning opening 9013 is provided. The game ball that has won the first starting winning opening 9013 is guided to the back surface of the game board 906 and detected by the first starting opening switch 9013a.

  Further, below the winning device having the first starting winning opening (first starting opening) 9013, a variable winning ball device 9015 having a second starting winning opening 9014 in which a game ball can be won is provided. The game ball that has won the second start winning opening (second starting opening) 9014 is guided to the back surface of the game board 906 and detected by the second starting opening switch 9014a. The variable winning ball device 9015 is opened by a solenoid 9016. When the variable winning ball device 9015 is in the open state, the game ball can enter the second starting winning opening 9014 (it becomes easy to start winning), which is in an advantageous state for the player. When the variable winning ball device 9015 is in the open state, the game balls are easier to win in the second starting winning port 9014 than in the first starting winning port 9013. In addition, in the state where the variable winning ball device 9015 is in the closed state, the gaming ball does not win the second starting winning port 9014. Therefore, in the state where the variable winning ball device 9015 is in the closed state, the game balls are easier to win in the first starting winning port 9013 than in the second starting winning port 9014. In addition, while the variable winning ball device 9015 is in a closed state, it may be difficult to win the prize, but it may be possible to win the prize (that is, the game ball is hard to win). Hereinafter, the first start winning opening 9013 and the second starting winning opening 9014 may be collectively referred to as a starting winning opening or a starting opening.

  Above the second special symbol display 908b, the second special symbol reserved memory display 9018b consisting of four displays for displaying the number of effective winning balls that have entered the second start winning port 9014, that is, the second reserved memory. It is provided. The second special symbol hold storage display 9018b increases the number of display devices to be turned on by 1 each time there is an effective start winning. Then, every time the variable display on the second special symbol display device 908b is started, the number of lighted display devices is reduced by one.

  Further, above the second special symbol reservation storage display 9018b, the number of effective winning balls that have entered the first starting winning opening 9013, that is, the first holding storage number (holding storage is also referred to as starting memory or starting winning storage. ) Is provided with a first special symbol reservation storage display 9018a consisting of four displays. The 1st special symbol reservation storage indicator 9018a increases the number of the indicator which lights each time there is an effective starting winning. Then, each time the variable display on the first special symbol display device 908a is started, the number of lighted display devices is reduced by one.

  The game machine drives a drive motor in response to the player operating the ball operation handle 905, and uses the rotational force of the drive motor to shoot the game ball into the game area 7 (not shown). ) Is provided. The game ball shot from the hitting ball launching device enters the game area 907 through a hit ball formed in a circular shape so as to surround the game area 907, and then comes down the game area 907. When the game ball enters the first starting winning opening 9013 and is detected by the first starting opening switch 9013a, if the variable display of the first special symbol can be started (for example, the variable display of the special symbol ends, the first 1 start condition is established), the first special symbol display device 908a variation display (variation) of the first special symbol is started, and the effect display device 909 starts variable display of the production symbol. That is, the variable display of the first special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to the winning of the first starting winning opening 9013. Unless the variable display of the first special symbol can be started, the first reserved storage number is increased by 1 on condition that the first reserved storage number has not reached the upper limit value.

  When the game ball enters the second starting winning opening 9014 and is detected by the second starting opening switch 9014a, if the variable display of the second special symbol can be started (for example, the variable display of the special symbol ends, the first 2 start condition is satisfied), the variable display (variation) of the second special symbol is started on the second special symbol display 908b, and the variable display of the effect symbol is started on the effect display device 909. That is, the variable display of the second special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to the winning of the second start winning port 9014. Unless the variable display of the second special symbol can be started, the second reserved storage number is increased by 1 on condition that the second reserved storage number has not reached the upper limit value.

  Effect display device 909, during the variable display time of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display 908a, and during the variable display time of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display 908b, for decoration (for production) Variable display of the effect design as the design of. The variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 908a and the variable display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 909 are synchronized. Further, the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 908b and the variable display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 909 are synchronized. Further, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 908a, and when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display device 908b, a production symbol that reminds the big hit on the effect display device 909. The combination of is stopped and displayed.

  Further, at a lower position on the display screen of the effect display device 909, a reservation storage display unit (a total reservation storage display unit) that displays the total number (the total reservation storage number) of the first reservation storage number and the second reservation storage number. , A hold display area (not shown) is provided. In the total pending storage display unit, the number of pending storages can be specified as the pending storage display, for example, by the number of displayed predetermined images (by displaying one pending storage image corresponding to each pending storage information, Specify the number of pending storage.) is displayed. As described above, since the total pending storage display unit that displays the total number is provided, it is possible to easily understand the total number of satisfied execution conditions in which the variable display start condition is not satisfied. In each of the first special symbol hold storage display 9018a, the second special symbol hold storage display 9018b, and the effect display device 909, the light emission display and the image display for indicating the number of hold storages are hold display or hold. Called memory display.

  As shown in FIG. 23, a special variable winning ball device 9020 is provided below the variable winning ball device 9015. The special variable winning ball device 9020 includes an opening/closing plate, and when the specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 908a, the specific display result (big hit symbol) on the second special symbol display 908b. In the specific game state (big hit game state) that occurs when is displayed and displayed, the open/close plate is controlled by the solenoid 9021 to be in the open state, so that the special winning opening serving as the winning area is in the open state. The game ball that has won the special winning opening is detected by the count switch 9023.

  In the big hit game state, the repetitive continuation control in which the special variable winning ball device 9020 repeats the open state and the closed state is performed. In the repeat continuation control, a state in which the special variable winning ball device 9020 is opened is called a round. Therefore, the repeat continuation control is also called round control. In the present embodiment, a plurality of types of big hits are provided, and when it is decided to make a big hit, one of the big hit types is selected.

  To the left of the effect display device 909, a normal symbol display 9010 that variably displays ordinary symbols that can be identified is provided. In this embodiment, the normal symbol display device 9010 is realized by a simple and small-sized display device (for example, 7-segment LED) capable of variably displaying the numbers 0-9. That is, the normal symbol display 9010 is configured to variably display numbers (or symbols) 0-9. Further, the small-sized display is formed, for example, in a rectangular shape.

  When the game ball passes through the gate 9032 and is detected by the gate switch 9032a, the variable display of the display of the normal symbol display 9010 is started. And, when the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 9010 is a predetermined symbol (hit symbol. For example, symbol “7”), the variable winning ball device 9015 is in a closed state that is disadvantageous to the player for a predetermined number of times and for a predetermined time. Changes to an open state that is advantageous for the player. In the vicinity of the normal symbol display device 9010, a normal symbol hold storage display device 9041 having a display unit with four LEDs for displaying the number of winning balls that have passed through the gate 9032 is provided. Every time there is a passage of the game ball to the gate 9032, that is, every time the game ball is detected by the gate switch 9032a, the normal symbol reservation storage display 9041 increments the LED to be turned on by one. Then, every time the variable display of the normal symbol display device 9010 is started, the number of LEDs to be turned on is reduced by 1.

  An accessory 9012 as a movable body is provided above the effect display device 909. The accessory 9012 is located between the game board 906 and the effect display device 909, and is operated by an accessory motor 9017 as a drive source, and the position can be displaced. The accessory 9012 is located in a place where it is difficult for the player to visually recognize it when not operating, and is in a position (for example, a position in front of the effect display device 909) which is visible to the player when the player performs an operation such as when a predetermined effect is executed. Moving.

  At the bottom of the game board 906, there is an out port 9026 into which hit balls that have not been won are taken. Further, four speakers 9027 for producing a sound effect and a sound as predetermined sound outputs are provided on the upper left and right sides and the lower left and right sides outside the game area 907. A frame LED 9028 provided on the front frame is provided on the outer periphery of the game area 907.

  In addition, a prepaid card unit (hereinafter, also simply referred to as a “card unit”) that enables a ball lending by inserting a prepaid card is installed adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 901 (not shown).

  In the hit type table of FIG. 24, for each type of hit in the big hit, the big hit probability after the big hit game state ends, the base after the big hit game state ends, the variation time after the big hit game state ends, the number of times of opening in the big hit ( The number of rounds) and the opening time of each round are shown.

  Specifically, in the jackpot gaming state, after the special variable winning ball device 9020 is in the open state, a predetermined open state ending condition (a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds) in the open state has elapsed, or When a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning balls have been established, the closed state is established. When the opening termination condition is satisfied, the continuation right is generated and the special variable winning ball device 9020 is opened again. The generation of the continuation right is repeated until the number of times of opening in the jackpot gaming state reaches 15 rounds (final round), which is a predetermined upper limit value.

  Among the "big hits", after being controlled to the big hit game state, the special variation state is a state in which the probability of being decided to be a big hit is higher than the normal state (normal game state that is not the certainty variation state) The type (class) of the big hit that shifts to (the abbreviation of the stochastic variation state and also called the high probability state) is called “probable variation big hit”. Further, in the present embodiment, as the special game state, when the variation time (variation display period) of the special symbol or the effect symbol is controlled to be a time saving state, which is shorter than the non-time saving state, in association with the probability variation state There is. The special game state may be controlled to a time saving state independently of the probability variation state.

  In this way, by shifting to the time saving state, the variation time of the special symbol and the effect symbol is shortened, so when the time saving state is reached, an effective starting winning is likely to occur and a jackpot game may be performed. Increase. Note that, of the "big hits", the kind of big hits that are not shifted to the probability changing state after being controlled to the big hit game state for 15 rounds are called "normal big hits".

  In addition, as the special game state, the frequency of the variable winning ball apparatus 9015 entering the variable winning ball apparatus 9015 is increased by increasing the frequency of the variable winning ball apparatus 9015 being opened in association with the probability changing state or the time saving state. In some cases, the variable winning ball device 9015 may be controlled to be in a power control support state that facilitates winning (increased entry and increased frequency). The power control support state is a high base state, as will be described later, and is therefore mainly referred to as a high base state in the following description.

  Here, the power control support control will be described. As the electric Chu support control, the variation time of the normal symbol (the time from the start of variation display to the time of deriving and displaying the display result) is shortened to derive and display the display result early (normal symbol shortening control), the ordinary symbol Control to increase the probability that the stop symbol becomes a winning symbol (normal symbol probability variation control), control to lengthen the opening time of the variable winning ball device 9015 (opening time extension control), and increase the number of times the variable winning ball device 9015 is opened. The control (control to increase the number of times of opening) is performed. When such control is performed, the ratio of time during which the variable winning ball unit 9015 is in the open state is higher than when the control is not performed. Therefore, the winning frequency to the second start winning port 9014 is increased. Is increased, the game ball is easy to start winning (the execution condition of the variable display on the special symbol display devices 908a and 908b and the effect display device 909 is easily established). By this control, the winning frequency to the second starting winning opening 9014 is increased, so that the gaming state in which the frequency of establishment of the second starting condition and/or the execution frequency of the variable display of the second special symbol is increased.

  The state (high-frequency state) in which the winning frequency to the second start winning port 9014 is increased by the electric Chu support control is the ratio of the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls in accordance with the winning number to the number of shot balls. Since the "base" is in a higher state than when the control is not performed, it is called the "high base state". Further, when such control is not performed, it is called "low base state". In addition, such control is control for facilitating the winning of the variable winning ball device 9015, that is, the variable winning ball device 9015 by supporting the winning by the electric tulip, and is referred to as “electric chew support control”.

  In this embodiment, as a term indicating a state of jackpot probability, a "high-probability state (probability variation state)" and a "low-probability state (non-probability variation state)" are used as a term indicating a combination of base states. , "High base state (electricity chew support control state)" and "low base state (non-electricity chew support control state)".

  In addition, in this embodiment, "low-probability low-base state", "low-probability high-base state", and "high-probability high-base state" are used as terms indicating the combination of the state of the jackpot probability and the state of the base. To use. The “low-probability low-base state” is a state that indicates that the state of jackpot probability is the low-probability state and the state of the base is the low-base state. The “low-probability high-base state” is a state in which a state with a big hit probability is a low-probability state, and a base state is a high-base state. The “high-accurate high-base state” is a state in which a state with a big hit probability is a high-probability state, and a base state is a high-base state.

  As shown in FIG. 24, as the 15-round big hits, a plurality of types of big hits are provided, which are a normal big hit and a probability variation big hit. The normal jackpot is a jackpot that is controlled to an uncertain variation state, a time saving state, and a high base state (low certainty high base state) after the 15 rounds of the jackpot game state have ended. In normal big hits, the non-probable variation state continues for the period until the next big hit occurs, and the short-time state and the high base state are executed until the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times 100 times, and the next big hit. The condition continues until the condition that occurs first, whichever is earlier, is satisfied. It should be noted that the normal big hit may be a big hit that is controlled to an uncertain variation state, a non-time saving state, and a non-electricity chew support control state (low accurate low base state).

  The probability variation jackpot is a jackpot in which control is performed to transition to the probability variation state, the time saving state, and the high base state (high-probability high base state) after the 15 rounds of the jackpot game state. In the probability variation big hit, such a condition that the high accuracy high base state is executed until the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times 100 times or the condition until the next big hit occurs, whichever comes first. It continues for a period of time.

  FIG. 25 is a block diagram showing an example of a circuit configuration in the main board (game control board) and the effect control board. Note that FIG. 25 also shows the payout control board 9037 and the like. A game control microcomputer (corresponding to game control means) 90560 for controlling the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program is mounted on the main board 9031. The game control microcomputer 90560 includes a ROM 9054 for storing programs for game control (game progress control), a RAM 9055 as storage means used as a work memory, a CPU 9056 for performing control operations according to the programs, and an I/O port unit. Including 9057. The game control microcomputer 90560 is a one-chip microcomputer in which a ROM 9054 and a RAM 9055 are built. The game control microcomputer 90560 further includes a random number circuit 90503 that generates a hardware random number (random number generated by a hardware circuit).

  Further, the RAM 9055 is a backup RAM as a non-volatile storage means, a part or all of which is backed up by a backup power supply created on a power supply board (not shown). That is, even if the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, a part or all of the content of the RAM 9055 is saved for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply cannot supply power). In particular, at least data corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means (such as a special symbol process flag) and the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are stored in the backup RAM.

  In the game control microcomputer 90560, the CPU 9056 executes control in accordance with the program stored in the ROM 9054, and hence the game control microcomputer 90560 (or CPU 9056) executes (or performs processing). Specifically, the CPU 9056 executes control according to a program. This also applies to the microcomputers mounted on other boards than the main board 9031.

  The random number circuit 90503 is a hardware circuit used to generate a random number for determination to determine whether or not to make a big hit based on the display result of the variable display of the special symbol. The random number circuit 90503 updates the numerical data according to the set update rule within the numerical range in which the initial value (for example, 0) and the upper limit value (for example, 65535) are set, and is generated at random timing. Based on the fact that the numerical value data is read (extracted) at the time of starting winning, a random number generating function is provided in which the numerical value data read becomes a random value. Further, the game control microcomputer 90560 has a function of setting an initial value of the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 90503.

  In addition, an input driver circuit 9058 for giving the detection signals from the gate switch 9032a, the first starting opening switch 9013a, the second starting opening switch 9014a, and the count switch 9023 to the game controlling microcomputer 90560 is also mounted on the main board 9031. Further, the output circuit 9059 which drives the solenoid 9016 for opening and closing the variable winning ball device 9015 and the solenoid 9021 for opening and closing the special variable winning ball device 9020 forming the special winning opening in accordance with a command from the game control microcomputer 90560 is also main. It is mounted on the substrate 9031.

  Further, the game control microcomputer 90560, the first special symbol display 908a, the second special symbol display 908b, which displays the special symbol in a variable manner, the normal symbol display 9010, which normally displays the variable in a symbol, the first special symbol reserved storage. Display control of the display 9018a, the second special symbol reservation storage display 9018b and the normal symbol reservation storage display 9041 is performed.

  The effect control board 9080 has an effect control microcomputer 90100, a ROM 90102, a RAM 90103, a VDP 90109, an I/O port unit 90105, and the like. The ROM 90102 stores programs and data for effect control such as display control. The RAM 90103 is used as a work memory. The ROM 90102 and the RAM 90103 may be incorporated in the effect control microcomputer 90100. The VDP 90109 cooperates with the effect control microcomputer 90100 to control the display of the effect display device 909.

  The effect control microcomputer 90100 instructs the effect contents from the game control microcomputer 90560 via the relay board 9077 that passes the signal only in one direction from the main board 9031 to the effect control board 9080. In addition to performing variable display control of the effect display device 909, display control of the frame LED 9028 provided on the frame side is performed via the lamp driver board 9035, and from the speaker 9027 via the audio output board 9070. Performs various effect controls, such as controlling the sound output of.

  Further, the effect control CPU 90101 outputs an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation on the trigger button 90125 of the stick controller 90122 is detected from the trigger sensor 90121 to the input port of the I/O port unit 90105. Enter via. Further, the effect control CPU 90101 inputs an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that a player's operation on the push button 90120 is detected, from the push sensor 90124 via the input port of the I/O port unit 90105. To do. Further, the effect control CPU 90101 inputs an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation on the operation stick of the stick controller 90122 is detected from the tilt direction sensor unit 90123 to the I/O port unit 90105. Enter through the port. Further, the effect control CPU 90101 outputs a drive signal to the vibrator motor 90126 via the output port of the I/O port unit 90105 to cause the stick controller 90122 to vibrate. Further, the effect control CPU 90101 drives the accessory motor 9017 through a motor drive circuit (not shown) to operate the accessory 9012.

  FIG. 26 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. In FIG. 26, types of random numbers, update ranges, uses, and addition conditions are shown. Each random number is used as follows.

  (1) Random R': A random counter for determining whether to make a big hit. The random R'is updated by 1 at 10 MHz, added and updated from 0, and then updated up to 65535 which is the upper limit thereof, and then added and updated again from 0. (2) Random 1'(MR1'): determine the type of jackpot (type, normal jackpot, and probability variation jackpot) and jackpot symbols (jackpot type determination, jackpot symbol determination). (3) Random 2'(MR2'): The type (type) of the variation pattern is determined (for determining the variation pattern type). (4) Random 3'(MR3'): Determines a variation pattern (variation time) (for variation pattern determination). (5) Random 4'(MR4'): Determine whether or not to generate a hit based on a normal symbol (for normal symbol hit determination). (6) Random 5'(MR5'): Determine the initial value of random 4'(for determining random 4'initial value).

  In this embodiment, a plurality of types of a normal big hit and a probability variation big hit are included as the big game in the specific game state. Therefore, when the big hit is decided based on the value of the big hit determination random number (random R′), the big hit type is either of these based on the value of the big hit type judgment random number (random 1′). It is decided by the jackpot type. Further, when the type of big hit is determined, at the same time, the big hit symbol is also decided based on the value of the random number for random determination (random 1'). Therefore, the random 1'is also a big hit symbol determination random number.

  Further, the variation pattern is first included in the determined variation pattern type by using the variation pattern type determination random number (random 2′) to determine the variation pattern type and using the variation pattern determination random number (random 3′). It is decided to be one of the fluctuation patterns. As such, in this embodiment, the variation pattern is determined by the two-stage lottery process. The variation pattern type is a group of a plurality of variation patterns grouped according to the characteristics of the variation mode. One or more fluctuation patterns belong to the fluctuation pattern type. The variation pattern type may also be referred to as a variation type.

  In this embodiment, the variation patterns are classified into a normal variation pattern type which is a variation pattern type without reach and a reach variation pattern type which is a variation pattern type with reach.

  Such a variation pattern type is set in such a manner that the selection ratio of the variation pattern type is different between the time saving state and the time saving state when the display result is out of order. When, the fluctuation time is shortened as compared with the case where the time saving state is not set. For example, in the short-time state, in order to shorten the average time of the change time compared to when it is not in the short-time state, the change time of a predetermined change pattern is set shorter than when it is not the short time state, or the change of the most The variation pattern type with the shortest time is selected at a high rate, and even when the reach type is selected, the variation rate of the normal reach with the shortest variation time among the variation pattern types is set to be high. By doing so, the average time of the fluctuation time becomes shorter than that in the case where the time saving state is not set.

  By the way, such a variation pattern type is set so that the selection ratios are different when the number of reserved memories of each special symbol to be displayed in variation is greater than or equal to a predetermined number, and when the number is less than the predetermined number. When the number of reserved storage of each special symbol to be variably displayed is a predetermined number or more, compared with when the number of reserved storage of each special symbol is less than the predetermined number, the number-of-holds shortening control that shortens the variable display time is executed. You may do so. For example, in the number-of-holds-shortening control state, it is set so that the rate of selection of a variation pattern type having a shorter variation display time, such as a normal variation pattern type, is higher than in the case of not in the number-of-holding number reduction control state. The average time of the variable display time may be shorter than that in the case where the number of held reservations reduction control is not performed. Further, in the hold number reduction control, even when the same change pattern type is selected, the change display time itself of the change pattern type may be shortened compared to when the hold number reduction control state is not set.

  Further, the variation pattern may be a one-step determination method in which the variation pattern is determined by one random number lottery, instead of the two-step determination method in which the variation pattern type is determined and then the variation pattern is determined.

  FIG. 27 is an explanatory diagram showing a big hit determination table and a big hit type determination table. FIG. 27A is an explanatory diagram showing a big hit determination table. The jackpot determination table is a set of data stored in the ROM 9054, and is a table in which jackpot determination values to be compared with the random R′ are set. The big hit judgment table includes a normal time (non-probability change time) big hit judgment table used in a normal state (a game state that is not a probability change state, that is, a non-probability change state), and a probability change time big hit judgment table used in a probability change state.

  In the normal-time jackpot determination table, each numerical value described in the left column of FIG. 27(A) is set as a jackpot determination value, and in the probability variation jackpot determination table, it is described in the right column of FIG. 27(A). Each numerical value is set as a jackpot judgment value. The big hit judgment value set in the big hit judgment table during the probability change is the same as the big hit judgment value set in the normal big hit judgment table (the big hit judgment value in normal time or the first big hit judgment value). Due to the addition of the unique jackpot determination value, a larger number (10 times the number) of jackpot determination values (referred to as a jackpot determination value or second jackpot determination value) than in the probability variation big hit determination table are set. .. As a result, the probability variation state is determined to be a big hit with a higher probability than the normal state.

  The CPU 9056 extracts the count value of the random number circuit 90503 and compares the extracted value with the value of the big hit judging random number (random R′) at a predetermined time. The big hit judging random number value is shown in FIG. If any of the jackpot determination values shown in (1), the jackpot (normal jackpot or probability variation jackpot) is determined for the special symbol. The “probability” shown in FIG. 27(A) indicates the probability (ratio) of a big hit.

  27B and 27C are explanatory diagrams showing the jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 9054. FIG. 27(B) is a case where the jackpot type is determined by using the reserved memory (also referred to as the first reserved memory) based on the fact that the game ball has won the first starting winning opening 9013 (variable display of the first special symbol is It is a first special symbol big hit type determination table (for the first special symbol) to be used). FIG. 27(C) is a case where the jackpot type is determined by using a reserved memory (also referred to as a second reserved memory) based on the fact that the game ball has won the second start winning opening 9014 (the variable display of the second special symbol is It is a second special symbol jackpot type determination table used when (when performed).

  27(B), and each of the first and second special symbol big hit type determination table of FIG. 27(C), when it is determined that the variable display result is a big hit symbol, for big hit type determination Based on the random number (random 1'), the type of big hit is determined to be either "normal big hit" or "probable variation big hit", and is referred to for determining big hit symbols.

  In the first special symbol jackpot type determination table of FIG. 27(B), a determination value corresponding to each of the "normal jackpot" and the "probable variation jackpot" (a jackpot type) is a numerical value that is compared with the value of random 1'. Judgment value) is set. In the second special symbol jackpot type determination table of FIG. 27(C), a determination value corresponding to each of the "normal jackpot" and the "probability variation jackpot" (a jackpot type) is a numerical value that is compared with the value of random 1'. Judgment value) is set.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 27B and 27C, the jackpot type determination value is also used as a determination value (a jackpot symbol determination value) for determining the jackpot symbols of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The judgment value corresponding to "normal big hit" is also set as the judgment value corresponding to "3" of the big hit symbols of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The determination value corresponding to the "probable variation big hit" is also set as the determination value corresponding to "7" of the big hit symbol of the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

  Using the jackpot type determination table, the CPU 9056 determines the type corresponding to the jackpot type determination value with which the value of random 1'is matched as the jackpot type, and the jackpot symbol with the value of random 1'is matched as the jackpot symbol. To decide. Thereby, the big hit type and the big hit symbol corresponding to the big hit type are simultaneously determined.

  The first special symbol jackpot type determination table of FIG. 27(B) and the second special symbol jackpot type determination table of FIG. 27(C) have the same proportion determined for the probability variation jackpot. In such a case, it is not necessary to divide the big hit type determination table between the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Further, as the big hit type, when selecting the big hit type from a plurality of kinds of big hits in which the maximum number of rounds in the big hit game state is different, the second special symbol big hit type determination table of FIG. It may be set so that the ratio of selection of the jackpot type having a larger number of rounds is higher than that in the first special symbol jackpot type determination table of (B). In this way, in the high base state, it is advantageous for the player to select the type of big hit, and the enjoyment of the game can be improved. Further, the second special symbol big hit type determination table of FIG. 27(C) may be set to have a higher probability of being determined for the probability variation big hit than the first special symbol big hit type determination table of FIG. 27(B). . By doing so, the variable display of the second special symbol can make the probability of the probability variation big hit higher than the variable display of the first special symbol. Further, the first special symbol big hit type determination table may be higher than the second special symbol big hit type determination table, the ratio determined as the probability variation big hit.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 28, a variation pattern table used in the game control microcomputer 90560 to select and determine variation patterns of special symbols and effect symbols will be described. FIG. 28 is a diagram showing, in a tabular form, a fluctuation pattern table used for determining a fluctuation pattern.

  In FIG. 28, (a) shows a determination table for out-of-normal state, and (b) shows a determination table for out-of-time state. Further, (c) shows a normal big hit time determination table, and (d) shows a probability variation big hit time determination table. Each of the determination tables of FIGS. 28A to 28D is stored in the ROM 9054, is selected according to the gaming state, and is used to determine (determine) the variation pattern type and the variation pattern.

  The determination table shown in FIG. 28 is a variation pattern type determination table showing the relationship between random 2′ and variation pattern types, and a variation pattern determination table showing the relationship between random 3′ and variation patterns belonging to each type for each variation pattern type. Including and

  In the columns of “variation pattern type” or “variation pattern” in each table of FIG. 28, “normal” or “normal variation” indicates a normal variation pattern that does not reach.

  Further, "normal reach" in each table of FIG. 28 shows a variation pattern of normal reach in which a particularly flashy effect is not executed when the reach state is reached. “Super reach” indicates a variation pattern for performing a reach effect that displays a special effect image when the reach state is reached.

  In addition, as described above, the “super reach” is a variation pattern that has a higher selection rate when a big hit occurs than the “normal reach” and has a high reliability of a big hit. Furthermore, “super reach” is a variation pattern in which the variation time is longer than that of “normal reach” (eg, normal reach 10 seconds, super reach 50 seconds to 80 seconds). In addition, four types of variation patterns are set in the super reach, and the jackpot expectation degree (be it a jackpot Possibility).

  Note that the “expectation degree” is a concept including the expectation degree for a big hit, the expectation degree for a probability change, and the like. Specifically, the degree of expectation (also called reliability) for a big hit is the degree of expectation that a big hit will occur when each reach variation pattern is selected (ratio of big hits). For example, the reach variation is performed 100 times. If a big hit occurs 60 times, the expectation level for the big hit is 60% (the appearance rate (probability) that the big hit appears is 60%). Further, the degree of expectation with respect to the probability change means the degree of expectation of transition to the probability change state (probability of probability change).

  In the pachinko gaming machine 901, a predetermined effect is produced in the effect display device 909 from the start of the variable display of the effect symbol as the identification information and the first and second special symbols until the display result is derived and displayed. As a mode, an effect called pseudo-relationship (hereinafter, referred to as pseudo-relationship effect) may be executed. Pseudo-relation is an effect display that shows what is originally one variation corresponding to one pending storage, as if a plurality of variations corresponding to a plurality of pending storage are continuously performed. Abbreviation for continuous variation.

  In addition, the pseudo-relation is within the fluctuation time determined for one starting prize, in order to make it appear as if the variable display (variable display) of the symbol is executed a plurality of times for one starting prize. Here, it means a special variation pattern (also referred to as variation display pattern) in which temporary stop and re-variation are executed (repeated) a predetermined number of times for all the symbol strings (left, middle, right). For example, the larger the number of repeated executions of re-variation (the total number of variations including the initial variation and subsequent re-variation, which is also referred to as the pseudo-repeated variation number), the greater the reliability of being a big hit (the deviation from the big hit). The degree of the proportion selected when the big hit occurs, the degree of the proportion of the big hit, that is, the degree of reliability of the big hit) is high for all the selection proportions including the time and. More specifically, by increasing the proportion selected when it is determined to be a big hit, it is suggested by a pseudo-relational effect whether or not to be a big hit game state. In the pseudo-variation variation pattern, a pseudo-relational pattern that is not included in the production pattern that is normally displayed in a variable manner (basically variable display) on the production display device 909 (for example, a predetermined character or a symbol with a character or the like attached thereto (number). Symbols not marked with, also referred to as pseudo-relational symbols)) are temporarily stopped. Note that in the pseudo-relation, the effect symbols (numerical symbols in this embodiment) that are normally displayed in a variable manner (basically, a variable display) may be temporarily stopped. A combination of symbols temporarily stopped on the effect display device 909 is called a combination of temporarily stopped symbols. The combination of the temporary stop symbols is determined as one of the pseudo consecutive chances from a plurality of types of chance eyes (hereinafter, referred to as pseudo consecutive appearance eyes (pseudo consecutive chance eyes)) that are combinations of symbols other than the combination of the big hit symbols. It should be done.

  Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 901, an effect in which the effect symbol slips may be performed. Here, the term “slip” means an effect display in which the symbol is slid from the predicted stop position immediately before the symbol stops in the variable display. In the second super reach, after that, one of the two effect symbols that had been temporarily stopped due to a deviation (a combination of deviations) in the left and right symbol display areas is stopped after one of the effect symbols slips, and the reach result (reach) is reached. A combination of symbols is formed, and a reach effect is executed.

  The variation pattern shown in the out-of-range determination table is a variation pattern in which the final display result of the variable display is the display result of “out”. The fluctuation pattern shown in the normal big hit time determination table is a fluctuation pattern in which the final display result of the variable display is the display result of "normal big hit". The variation pattern shown in the probability variation big hit determination table is a variation pattern in which the final display result of the variation display is the display result of "probability variation big hit".

  Based on these pieces of information, for example, the variation pattern “4th super reach (130 seconds)” shown in the column of “variation pattern” in FIG. The variation pattern of the fourth super reach executed in seconds” is shown.

  In the table of FIG. 28, the columns described as “random 2′ range” and “variation pattern type” are used as a variation pattern type determination table section showing the relationship between “random 2′ range” and “variation pattern type”. This is a column showing the function. For example, in the case of FIG. 28A, all the values of random 2'(1-251) are assigned to each of a plurality of fluctuation pattern types such as "normal", "normal reach", and "super reach". It is assigned to multiple numerical ranges. For example, taking FIG. 28A as an example, the value of the random 2′ extracted at a predetermined timing matches any one of the determination values assigned to 140 to 229 among the random number values of 1 to 251. Then, it is determined that the variation pattern type is “normal reach”.

  Further, in the table of FIG. 28, the columns in which “random 3′ range” and “variation pattern” are described function as a variation pattern determination table section showing the relationship between “random 3′ range” and “variation pattern”. Is a column indicating. The variation patterns shown in association with each type in the variation pattern type determination table are the variation patterns belonging to each type. For example, in the case of FIG. 28A, the variation patterns belonging to the type of “super reach” are “first super reach”, “second super reach”, “third super reach”, and “third super reach”. 4 Super reach”.

  All the values of random 3'(1-220) are assigned to a plurality of numerical ranges and are assigned to each of the plurality of variation patterns corresponding to each fluctuation pattern type. For example, taking FIG. 28A as an example, when it is determined that the variation pattern type of “super reach” is determined, random 3′ extracted at a predetermined timing is a random number value of 1 to 220. When it matches with any one of the determination values assigned to 1 to 70, it is determined that the variation pattern is “first super reach (50 seconds)”.

  When the variation display result is out of place for the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the determination table is selected as follows in order to determine the variation pattern. In the non-time saving state, when the variation display result is out of alignment, the out of position determination table in the normal state of FIG. 28A is selected. On the other hand, in the time saving state, when the variable display result is out of alignment, the out of time saving state determination table in FIG. 28B is selected. By using the determination tables of FIGS. 28A and 28B, the reach ratios at the time of deviation from the normal state and at the time of deviation from the time saving state are made constant regardless of the number of holdings.

  When the variable display result is a big hit for the first special symbol or the second special symbol regardless of whether it is a time saving state, in order to determine the variation pattern, the determination table is selected as follows. When the variation display result is a normal big hit, the normal big hit determination table of FIG. 28C is selected. When the variation display result is the probability variation big hit irrespective of the time saving state, the probability variation big hit time determination table of FIG. 28D is selected.

  In the time difference state determination table of FIG. 28(b), the variation time of the normal fluctuation is set shorter than that of the normal state determination table of FIG. 28(a). 28B, the variation time is shorter than the reach variation (including the normal reach variation and the super reach variation) in the time difference deviation determination table in FIG. 28A as compared with the normal condition deviation determination table in FIG. 28A. Normal fluctuations (non-reach deviation fluctuations (variations that cause deviation display results instead of reach)) are high, and the fluctuations that reach longer than normal fluctuations are less likely to be determined. The data is set.

  As a result, compared to the case of the non-time saving state (normal state), in the time saving state, the rate of selection of the variation pattern with the short variation time is higher, so that in the time saving state, the non-time saving state is more likely to be selected. The fluctuation display is performed on average in a shorter fluctuation time than the case. By selecting the determination table in this way, the time saving state can be realized. Further, by setting the normal fluctuation such that the fluctuation time is shorter in the time-saving state than in the non-time-saving state, it is possible to shorten the pending digestion during the time-saving state.

  In the determination tables of FIGS. 28(a) and 28(b), which are selected when there is a deviation, data is set so that the selection ratio of the type of reach is such that normal reach>super reach is selected. Has been done. On the other hand, in the determination tables of FIGS. 28(c) and 28(d), which are selected when the jackpot is a big hit, the selection ratios of the types of reach are selected according to the relationship of normal reach<super reach. The data is set. As a result, when the jackpot is hit, the ratio of the reach effect of the super reach (the ratio of the reach effect of the super reach when the reach is selected) is higher than when it is out of reach, so that the reach of the super reach is increased. The production can enhance the player's expectation.

  Further, in the determination table of FIG. 28(d), which is selected when the jackpot is the probability variation big jackpot, the normal reach is higher than that of the determination table of FIG. 28(c) which is selected when the jackpot is the regular jackpot. On the other hand, the data is set so that the ratio of selecting the type of super reach production is high. As a result, when the probability variation jackpot is high, the proportion of the reach effect of super reach reached (the proportion of the reach effect of the super reach when the reach is selected) is higher than that of the normal jackpot. By performing the reach effect of the reach, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for the probability variation big hit.

  In addition, such a variation pattern, when the total number of reserved storages (total value) of the first special symbol and the second special symbol which are displayed in a variable manner is a predetermined number or more (for example, the total number of reserved storages is 3 or more) When the total number of pending storages is greater than or equal to the predetermined number, the variation time is set to be different from that when the total number of pending storages is less than the predetermined number by setting the selection ratio differently when the total number is less than the predetermined number. You may make it perform the hold|maintenance number shortening control which is shortened. However, even under the condition that the hold number reduction control is executed (for example, the total hold storage number is 3 or more), by keeping the ratio of the reach (including the normal reach and the super reach) constant, the expectation for the reach is maintained. In addition, it is also possible to execute the hold number reduction time reduction control so that the variation time is not shortened only in the super reach among the reach. Furthermore, the number-of-holding time saving control may be executable by selecting a high rate of normal variation having a short variation time, or may be executable by shortening the variation time of each variation pattern itself, The combination may be sufficient.

  FIG. 29 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 90560. In the game control microcomputer 90560, as shown in FIG. 29, various effect control commands are transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 90100 according to the game control state.

  Main commands in FIG. 29 will be described. The command 80XX (H) is an effect control command (fluctuation pattern command) for designating a variation pattern of the effect symbol that is variably displayed on the effect display device 909 in response to the variable display of the special symbol (corresponding to each variation pattern XX. ). That is, when a unique number is given to each of the usable fluctuation patterns as shown in FIG. 29, there is a fluctuation pattern command corresponding to each of the fluctuation patterns specified by the number. “(H)” indicates a hexadecimal number. The effect control command for designating the variation pattern is also a command for designating the variation start. Therefore, when the effect control CPU 90101 receives the command 80XX(H), the effect control CPU 90101 controls the effect display device 909 to start the variable display of effect symbols.

  The commands 8C01(H) to 8C03(H) are display result designating commands indicating whether or not to make a big hit and a big hit type.

  Command 8D01 (H) is a first symbol variation designation command indicating that the variable display of the first special symbol is started. Command 8D02 (H) is a second symbol variation designation command indicating that the variable display of the second special symbol is started. The command 8F00 (H) is a command (designation designation command) for designating the end of the variation of the first and second special symbols.

  The commands A001 to A002 (H) are big hit start designation commands for designating the big hit game state start for each big hit type (normal big hit or probability variation big hit).

  The command A1XX(H) is a special winning opening open designation command which indicates a display during opening of the special winning opening for the number (round) indicated by XX. A2XX(H) is a command after opening the special winning opening indicating that the opening (closing) of the number (round) of the XX number of times is open.

  The commands A301 to A302 (H) are jackpot end designation commands that designate the jackpot gaming state end for each jackpot type (normal jackpot or probability variation jackpot).

  The command A 401 (H) is a first start winning a prize designating command that specifies that the first starting award has been won. The command A402(H) is a second start winning a prize designating command that specifies that the second starting award has been won.

  The command B000(H) is a normal state designation command that designates that the gaming state is the normal state (low probability state). The command B001 (H) is a time saving state designation command for designating that the gaming state is a time saving state (high base state). The command B002(H) is a probability variation state designation command that designates that the gaming state is a probability variation state (high probability state).

  The command C0XX(H) is a total reserved storage number designation command indicating the total reserved storage number. The command C100(H) is a total reserved storage number subtraction designation command indicating that the total reserved storage number is decremented by one. In this embodiment, the command for designating the total number of reserved storages is executed when the game ball is started and won in the first start winning opening 9013 or the second starting winning opening 9014 (for example, when the starting opening switch passing process described later is executed). , To the effect control microcomputer 90100 (see S901221 and S901232 in FIG. 33). Further, the summed reserved storage number subtraction designation command is sent to the effect control microcomputer 90100 at the start of variable display (for example, at the time of execution of a special symbol variable display process described later). The total reserved storage designation command and the reserved storage number subtraction designation command may be used together. For example, the total reserved storage number designation command may be used as a command capable of specifying the reserved storage number after subtraction. It should be noted that commands for specifying the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number are transmitted instead of the total reserved memory number, and the production control microcomputer 90100 causes the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number. The total value of and may be specified as the total pending storage number.

  The command C2XX(H) and the command C3XX(H) are results of winning determination such as a big hit determination, a big hit type determination, and a variation pattern type determination at the time of a start winning to the first start winning opening 9013 or the second starting winning opening 9014. It is a production control command indicating the contents. Of these, the command C2XX (H) is a symbol designating command indicating whether or not to be a big jackpot in the determination result at the time of winning, and the determination result of the type of the jackpot. Further, the command C3XX(H) is a variation type command indicating a determination result (variation pattern type determination result) of which determination value range the variation pattern type random number value is in the winning determination result. Is.

  In this embodiment, in the winning effect processing (see S901217 and S901228 in FIG. 33), the game control microcomputer 90560 determines whether or not to be a big hit at the time of starting winning, a big hit type, and a variation pattern type determination random number. It is determined which judgment value range the value of is. Then, in the EXT data of the symbol designating command, a value designating a big hit and a value designating the type of the big hit are set, and control is performed to transmit to the effect control microcomputer 90100. The EXT data of the variation type command is set to a value designating the range of the determination value as the determination result of the variation pattern type, and is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 90100. In this embodiment, the effect control microcomputer 90100 can recognize whether or not the display result is a big hit at the time of the start winning, and the type of the big hit, based on the value set in the symbol designating command, The variation pattern type can be recognized based on the variation type command.

  FIG. 30 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of a pending storage buffer in the game control microcomputer 90560.

  FIG. 30A is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of the reserved storage specific information storage area (reserved specific area). The reserved specific area is formed in the RAM 9055 (which is an area in the RAM 9055), and as shown in FIG. 30A, the maximum value of the value of the total reserved storage number counter (8 in this example) that counts the total reserved storage number. ) Area is secured. FIG. 30A shows an example in which the value of the total pending storage number counter is 5.

  As shown in FIG. 30(A), in the reserved specific area, it is "first" or "second" in the winning order based on the winning of the first starting winning opening 9013 or the second starting winning opening 9014. The indicated data is set. Therefore, data which can specify the winning order to the first starting winning opening 9013 and the second starting winning opening 9014 is stored in the reserved specific area. The reserved specific area is formed in the RAM 55.

  FIG. 30B is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of a storage area (holding storage buffer) for storing random numbers and the like corresponding to the holding storage. As shown in FIG. 30(B), a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value (4 in this example) of the first reserved storage number is secured in the first reserved storage buffer. In addition, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value (4 in this example) of the second reserved storage number is secured in the second reserved storage buffer. The first pending storage buffer and the second pending storage buffer are formed in the RAM 9055. In the first pending storage buffer and the second pending storage buffer, a jackpot determination random number (random R′) that is a hardware random number, a jackpot type determination random number (random 1′) that is a software random number, and a variation pattern type determination For random number (random 2') and fluctuation pattern determination random number (random 3') are stored.

  Based on the winning in the first start winning opening 9013 or the second starting winning opening 9014, the CPU 56 extracts such random number values from the random number circuit 503 and a random counter for generating software random numbers, A process of saving (storing) in the save area of the first pending storage buffer or the second pending storage buffer is executed. Specifically, based on the winning of the first start winning opening 9013, these random number values are extracted and stored in the first reserved storage buffer. Also, based on the winning of the second start winning port 9014, these random number values are extracted and stored in the second reserved storage buffer.

  In this way, the storage of the above-described information relating to the starting winning in the first reserved storage buffer or the second reserved storage buffer may be referred to as “stored”. Further, the numerical data stored in the first pending storage buffer may be referred to as first pending storage information, and the numerical data stored in the second pending storage buffer may be referred to as second pending storage information. It should be noted that the variation pattern type determination random number (random 2') and the variation pattern determination random number (random 3') are not extracted and stored in the storage area in advance at the time of starting winning, but the variation pattern setting described later. You may make it extract in a process (at the time of a fluctuation start of a special symbol).

  The data thus stored in the reserved specific area and the storage area are read at the start of variable display and used for variable display. In addition, before reading the data stored in the reserved specific area and the storage area at the time of the start winning, and starting the variable display for which the possibility of the variable display result being a "big hit" is announced, a special symbol It may be used for a pre-reading notice effect that can be executed based on the pending information of the variable display of.

  When there is a starting winning prize to the first starting winning opening 9013 or the second starting winning opening 9014, commands such as a symbol designating command, a variation type command, and a total reserved storage number designating command are transferred from the main board 9031 to the effect control board 9080. Sent. In the start winning award reception command buffer provided in the RAM 90103 of the effect control microcomputer 90100, it is possible to store various commands such as the received symbol designating command, variation type command, and total reserved storage number designating command in association with each other. A storage area for storing data that can specify the received command is secured.

  In this embodiment, the effect control pattern of the effect symbol performed corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the variable display operation of the effect symbol, the reach, corresponding to a plurality of types of variation patterns. It is composed of data indicating the control contents of various effect operations such as effect display operations in effects, or various effect operations that are not accompanied by variable display of effect symbols. In addition, the notice production control pattern is composed of data or the like indicating the control content of the production operation that is the notice production executed corresponding to the notice patterns prepared in advance. Various effect control patterns correspond to various effect operations executed according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and are composed of data indicating the control content thereof.

  Next, the operation of the pachinko gaming machine 901 will be described. In the pachinko gaming machine 901, when the game control microcomputer 90560 on the main board 9031 executes a predetermined main process, a timer interrupt is periodically performed every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and a timer interrupt process is executed. By doing so, various game controls can be executed.

  In the main processing, for example, necessary initial setting processing, normal time initializing processing, game state recovery processing other than normal time, random number circuit setting processing (initial setting of random number circuit 90503), display random number updating processing (variation pattern) Type determination, update processing of various random numbers such as variation pattern determination), and random number update processing for initial values (update processing of initial value of count value of normal symbol per determination random number generation counter) and the like are executed.

  FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt processing. When the timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 9056 executes the timer interrupt process of steps S (hereinafter, simply referred to as “S”) 9020 to S9034 shown in FIG. In the timer interrupt process, first, a power-off detection process is performed to detect whether a power-off signal has been output (whether or not it has been turned on) (S9020). Next, the detection signals of the gate switch 9032a, the first starting port switch 9013a, the second starting port switch 9014a, and the count switch 9023 are input via the input driver circuit 9058, and the state of these signals is determined (switch processing: S9021). ..

  Next, the CPU 9056 is the first special symbol display 908a, the second special symbol display 908b, the normal symbol display 9010, the first special symbol reservation storage display 9018a, the second special symbol reservation storage display 9018b, the normal symbol A display control process for controlling the display of the pending storage display 9041 is executed (S9022). Regarding the first special symbol display device 908a, the second special symbol display device 908b and the normal symbol display device 9010, control to output a drive signal to each display device according to the contents of the output buffer set in S9032 and S9033. To execute.

  In addition, a process for updating the count value of each counter for generating each random number for determination such as a random number for normal symbol determination and a random number for determining jackpot type used for game control is performed (determination random number update process: S9023). .. The CPU 9056 further performs a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number and the display random number (initial value random number update process, display random number update process: S9024, S9025).

  Further, the CPU 9056 performs special symbol process processing (S9026). In the special symbol process process, the first special symbol display 908a, the second special symbol display 908b and the special symbol process flag for controlling the special winning opening in a predetermined order, the corresponding process is executed, and the special symbol process The value of the flag is updated according to the game state.

  Next, normal symbol process processing is performed (S9027). In the normal symbol process process, the CPU 9056 executes a corresponding process according to the normal symbol process flag for controlling the display state of the normal symbol display 9010 in a predetermined order, and sets the value of the normal symbol process flag to the game state. Update accordingly.

  Further, the CPU 9056 performs a process of sending a production control command to the production control microcomputer 90100 (production control command control process: S9028). Further, the CPU 9056 performs an information output process for outputting data such as big hit information, starting information, probability variation information, etc. supplied to the hall management computer (S9029).

  Further, the CPU 9056 executes prize ball processing for setting the number of prize balls based on the detection signals of the first start port switch 9013a, the second start port switch 9014a and the count switch 9023 (S9030).

  In this embodiment, the RAM area (output port buffer) corresponding to the output state of the output port is provided. However, the CPU 9056 is concerned with turning on/off the solenoid in the RAM area corresponding to the output state of the output port. The content is output to the output port (S9031: output process).

  Further, the CPU 9056 performs a special symbol display control process for setting special symbol display control data for performing special symbol effect display according to the value of the special symbol process flag in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data ( S9032).

  Further, the CPU 9056 performs a normal symbol display control process for setting the normal symbol display control data for performing the normal symbol effect display according to the value of the normal symbol process flag in the output buffer for the normal symbol display control data setting ( S9033). Further, the CPU 9056 outputs the drive signal in S9022 in accordance with the display control data set in the output buffer to execute the effect display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 9010.

  After that, the interrupt permission state is set (S9034), and the process ends. According to the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is activated every predetermined time.

  FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the special symbol process process (S9026). In the special symbol process process, a process for controlling the first special symbol display device 908a or the second special symbol display device 908b and the special winning opening is executed. In the special symbol process process, a starting port switch passage process is executed (S90312). Then, any one of S90300 to S90307 is performed according to the internal state.

  In the game control microcomputer 90560, the RAM 9055 stores the pending storage data (first pending storage data) such as the big hit determination random number obtained based on the starting winning into the first starting winning opening 9013 as described above. A first reserved storage buffer, and a second reserved storage buffer for storing reserved storage data (second reserved storage data) such as a big hit determination random number obtained based on the start winning to the second start winning opening 9014. Is provided. A storage area corresponding to the upper limit value (4 in this example) of the number of storages of each pending storage is secured in each of the pending storage buffers.

  In the starting opening switch passage processing, if the first starting opening switch 9013a is turned on, the number of stored first reserved storage data is conditioned on the condition that the first reserved storage number has not reached the upper limit value (for example, 4). The value of the first reserved memory number counter that counts is incremented by 1, and numerical data (for example, a big hit determination random number, a variation pattern type determination random number, and a variation pattern determination are obtained from a random number circuit 90503 or a counter for generating a software random number. Random numbers) are extracted and stored (stored) in the storage area of the first pending storage buffer. Further, the value of the total pending storage number counter is incremented by 1, and a process of storing (storing) data indicating “first” in the pending specific area corresponding to the value of the total pending storage number counter after totaling is executed. On the other hand, if the second starting opening switch 9014a is turned on, the number of stored second reserved storage data is counted on the condition that the second reserved storage number has not reached the upper limit value (for example, 4). The value of the reserved memory number counter is incremented by 1, and numerical data (for example, a big hit determination random number, a variation pattern type determination random number, and a variation pattern determination random number) is extracted from a random number circuit 90503 or a counter for generating a software random number. Then, a process of storing (storing) them in the storage area of the second reserved storage buffer is executed. Further, the value of the total pending storage number counter is incremented by 1, and a process of storing (storing) data indicating “second” in the pending specific area corresponding to the value of the total pending storage number counter after totaling is executed.

  The processing of S90300 to S90307 is the following processing. The special symbol normal process (S90300) is a process of determining whether or not the display result of the variable display is a big hit, and a big hit type in the case of a big hit. The fluctuation pattern setting process (S90301) determines a fluctuation pattern (a fluctuation pattern type determination random number and a fluctuation pattern determination using the fluctuation pattern determination random number), and measures a fluctuation time according to the determined fluctuation pattern. Is a process for performing control such as start of clocking of a variable time timer.

  The display result designation command transmission process (S90302) is a process of controlling to transmit the display result designation command to the effect control microcomputer 90100. The special symbol changing process (S90303) is a process of advancing the process to the special symbol stop process when the change time of the change pattern selected in the change pattern setting process elapses. Special symbol stop process (S90304), the variation display on the first special symbol display 908a or the second special symbol display 908b when the passage of the variation time corresponding to the determined variation pattern is timed by the variation time timer It is a process of stopping and deriving and displaying a stop symbol.

  The special winning opening opening pre-processing (S90305) is a processing of performing control for opening the special winning opening in the special variable winning ball device 9020 according to the type of the big hit. The special winning opening opening process (S90306) confirms the control of transmitting the effect control command for the round display effect in the big hit game state to the effect control microcomputer 90100, and the establishment of the closing condition of the special winning opening. This is processing for performing processing and the like. When the closing condition for the special winning opening is satisfied and there are still remaining rounds, the process proceeds to the special opening opening pre-processing (S90305). When all rounds have been completed, the jackpot ending process (S90307) is entered. The big hit ending process (S90307) is a process for causing the effect control microcomputer 90100 to perform display control for notifying the player that the big hit game state has ended.

  FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the starting opening switch passage processing of S90312. In the starting opening switch passage processing, the CPU 9056 first confirms whether or not the first starting opening switch 9013a is in the ON state (S901121). If the first starting opening switch 9013a is not in the on state, the process proceeds to S901222. If the first starting opening switch 9013a is in the ON state, the CPU 9056 determines whether or not the first reserved storage number has reached the upper limit value (specifically, the first reserved storage for counting the first reserved storage number). It is confirmed whether or not the value of the number counter is 4 (S901212). If the first number of reserved storages has reached the upper limit value, the process proceeds to S901222.

  If the first reserved storage number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 9056 increments the value of the first reserved storage number counter by 1 (S901213) and sets the value of the total reserved storage number counter for counting the total reserved storage number. Increase by 1 (S901214). Further, the CPU 9056, in the reserved storage specific information storage area (reserved specific area) for storing the winning order to the first start winning opening 9013 or the second starting winning opening 9014 described in FIG. Data indicating "first" is set in the area corresponding to the value of the number counter (S901215).

  In this embodiment, when the first start opening switch 9013a is in the ON state (that is, when the game ball has won the start winning in the first start winning opening 9013), data indicating "first" is set, When the second start opening switch 9014a is turned on (that is, when the game ball enters the second start winning opening 9014), the data indicating "second" is set. For example, the CPU 9056 sets 01(H) as data indicating "first" when the first starting opening switch 9013a is turned on in the holding storage specifying information storage area (holding specified area) shown in FIG. When the second starting opening switch 9014a is turned on, 02 (H) is set as data indicating "second". In this case, if there is no corresponding pending storage, 00(H) is set in the pending storage specifying information storage area (holding specific area).

  As shown in FIG. 30(A), an area corresponding to the maximum value (8 in this example) of the value of the total pending storage number counter is secured in the reserved specific area, and the first start winning opening 9013, or , Data indicating "first" or "second" in the winning order is set based on the winning in the second start winning port 9014. Therefore, the payout order to the first start winning opening 9013 or the second starting winning opening 9014 is stored in the holding storage specific information storage area (holding specific area).

  Next, the CPU 9056 executes a process of extracting values from the random number circuit 90503 and a counter for generating software random numbers, and storing them in the storage area of the first pending storage buffer (see FIG. 30B) ( S901216). In the process of S901216, a big hit determination random number (random R'), a big hit type determination random number (random 1'), a variation pattern type determination random number (random 2'), and a variation pattern determination random number (random 3'). Is extracted and stored in the storage area.

  Next, the CPU 9056 executes a winning-time effect process for previously determining a change display result and a change pattern type when a change based on the detected start winning is subsequently executed (S901217). Then, the CPU 9056 performs control to transmit a symbol designating command to the effect control microcomputer 90100 based on the determination result of the winning effect process (S901218), and also transmits a variation type command to the effect control microcomputer 90100. Control is performed (S901219). Further, the CPU 9056 controls to send the first start winning award designation command to the effect control microcomputer 90100 (S901220), sets the value of the summed hold storage number counter in the EXT data, and issues the summed hold storage number designation command. The control for transmission to the effect control microcomputer 90100 is performed (S901221).

  By executing the processing of S901218 and S901219, in this embodiment, regardless of the game state (high probability state, low probability state, high base state, low base state, gaming state such as jackpot game state) Every time the winning a prize is given to the starting winning opening 9013, both the symbol designating command and the variation type command are transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 90100.

  In addition, in this embodiment, by executing the processing of S901218 to S901221, when the start winning to the first starting winning opening 9013 occurs, the symbol designating command, the variation type command, the first starting winning designation command And a set of four commands of the total reserved storage number designation command is collectively transmitted within one timer interrupt.

  Next, the CPU 9056 confirms whether or not the second starting port switch 9014a is in the on state (S901222). If the second starting opening switch 9014a is not in the on state, the processing is ended as it is. If the second starting opening switch 9014a is in the ON state, the CPU 9056 determines whether or not the second reserved storage number has reached the upper limit value (specifically, the second reserved storage for counting the second reserved storage number). It is confirmed whether or not the value of the number counter is 4 (S901223). If the second number of reserved storages has reached the upper limit value, the processing is terminated as it is.

  If the second reserved storage number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 9056 increments the value of the second reserved storage number counter by 1 (S901224) and sets the value of the total reserved storage number counter for counting the total reserved storage number. Increase by 1 (S901225). Further, the CPU 9056 sets the data indicating “second” in the area corresponding to the value of the total pending storage number counter in the pending storage specific information storage area (pending specific area) (S901226).

  Next, the CPU 9056 executes a process of extracting values from the random number circuit 90503 and a counter for generating a software random number, and storing them in the storage area in the second reserved storage buffer (see FIG. 30B) ( S901227). In the process of S901227, a big hit determination random number (random R'), a big hit type determination random number (random 1'), a variation pattern type determination random number (random 2'), and a variation pattern determination random number (random 3). ′) is extracted and stored in the storage area.

  Next, the CPU 9056 executes a winning effect process (S901228). Then, the CPU 9056 performs control for transmitting the symbol designating command to the effect control microcomputer 90100 based on the determination result of the winning effect process (S901229), and also controls for transmitting the variation type command to the effect control microcomputer 90100. Is performed (S901230). In addition, the CPU 9056 controls to send the second start winning award designation command to the effect control microcomputer 90100 (S901231), sets the value of the summed hold storage number counter in the EXT data, and issues the summed hold storage number designation command. The control for transmission to the effect control microcomputer 90100 is performed (S901232).

  By executing the processing of S901229 and S901230, in the present embodiment, regardless of the game state (high probability state, low probability state, high base state, low base state, gaming state such as jackpot game state) Every time the winning a prize is given to the starting winning opening 9014, both the symbol designating command and the variation type command are transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 90100.

  In addition, in this embodiment, by executing the processing of S901229 to S901232, when the start winning to the second starting winning opening 9014 occurs, the symbol designation command, the variation type command, the second starting winning designation command And, a set of four commands of the total reserved storage number designation command is collectively transmitted within one timer interrupt.

  FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the special symbol normal process (S90300) in the special symbol process process. In the special symbol normal processing, the CPU 9056 confirms whether or not there is pending storage data in the first pending storage buffer or the second pending storage buffer (S9051). If there is no pending storage data in either the first pending storage buffer or the second pending storage buffer, the customer waiting state designation command for designating the customer waiting state mode is issued if the customer waiting state designation command has not been transmitted yet. Processing for transmission is performed (S9077), and the special symbol normal processing ends. Here, when the customer waiting state designation command is transmitted, the customer waiting state designation command transmitted flag indicating that the customer waiting state designation command has been transmitted is set. Then, when the special symbol normal processing after the next timer interruption is executed after transmitting the customer waiting state designation command, the customer waiting state designation command transmitted flag is set based on the fact that the customer waiting state designation command transmitted flag is set again. It is controlled not to send the wait state specification command. Such a customer waiting state designation command transmitted flag is reset when the next variable display of special symbols is started.

  When there is pending storage data in the first pending storage buffer or the second pending storage buffer, the CPU 9056 causes the first data of the data set in the pending specific area (see FIG. 30A) to be “first”. It is confirmed whether or not the data is the data indicating (S9052). When the first data set in the reserved specific area is not data indicating "first" (that is, data indicating "second") (N in S9052), the CPU 9056 causes the special symbol pointer (first Data indicating "second" is set to a flag indicating whether special symbol process processing is being performed for the special symbol or special symbol process processing is being performed for the second special symbol (S9053). When the first data set in the reserved specific area is data indicating "first" (Y in S9052), the CPU 90103 sets data indicating "first" in the special symbol pointer (S9054).

  In this embodiment, hereinafter, depending on whether the data indicating "first" or the data indicating "second" is set to the special symbol pointer, the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 908a. The variable display and the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 908b are executed using a common processing routine. When the data indicating "first" is set to the special symbol pointer, based on the pending storage data stored in the first pending storage buffer, the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 908a is performed. Be done. On the other hand, when the data indicating "second" is set to the special symbol pointer, based on the pending storage data stored in the second pending storage buffer, the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 908b. Is performed.

  By executing the processing of S9052 to S9054, in this embodiment, the first start winning opening 9013 and the second starting winning opening 9014 according to the starting winning order in which the game balls have won, therefore, the variable display of the first special symbol. Alternatively, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed.

  Next, in the RAM 9055, the CPU 9056 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number =1 indicated by the special symbol pointer and stores it in the reserved storage buffer of the RAM 9055 (S9055). Specifically, the CPU 9056, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number=1 in the first reserved storage buffer. Is stored in the reserved storage buffer of the RAM 9055. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the CPU 9056 reads each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number=1 in the second reserved storage buffer. The data is stored in the reserved storage buffer of the RAM 9055.

  Then, the CPU 9056 subtracts 1 from the count value of the pending storage number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (S9056). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 9056 subtracts 1 from the count value of the first pending storage number counter, and also in each storage area in the first pending storage buffer. Shift content. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the count value of the second reserved storage number counter is decremented by 1, and the contents of each storage area in the second reserved storage buffer are shifted.

  After the process of S9056 is executed, the count value of the total pending storage number counter that is formed in the RAM 9055 and counts the total pending storage number is decremented by 1 (S9057). The CPU 9056 saves the value of the total pending storage number counter before the count value is subtracted by 1 in a predetermined area of the RAM 9055 and shifts the content stored in the pending specific storage area.

  That is, in the case where the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 9056 displays the first reserved storage buffer of the RAM 9055 in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number=n (n=2, 3, 4). Each stored random number value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the first number of pending storages=n-1. When the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, each is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second number of reserved memories=n (n=2, 3, 4) in the second reserved memory buffer of the RAM 9055. The random number value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number=n-1. Further, the CPU 9056 adds the values (the values indicating “first” or “second”) stored in the storage areas corresponding to the total number of pending storages=m (m=2 to 8) in the pending specific area. Store in the storage area corresponding to the number of reserved storages=m-1. Therefore, the order in which the random number values stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the respective first reserved memory numbers (or the respective second reserved memory numbers) are always extracted is always the first reserved memory number (or, The second reserved memory number)=1, 2, 3, 4 and the order. Further, the order in which the respective values stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the respective total reserved storage numbers are extracted is always the same as the order of the total reserved storage numbers=1-8.

  In the special symbol normal process, first, the data indicating "first" indicating that the process is executed targeting the first starting winning opening 9013, that is, indicating that the process is performed targeting the first special symbol "first" Or data indicating "second" indicating that the process is executed for the second start winning opening 9014, that is, indicating "second" indicating that the process is executed for the second special symbol. The data is set in the special symbol pointer. Then, in the subsequent processing in the special symbol process processing, processing according to the data set in the special symbol pointer is executed. Therefore, the processing of S90300 to S90307 can be shared between the case of targeting the first special symbol and the case of targeting the second special symbol.

  Next, the CPU 9056 reads out a random R'(random number for jackpot determination) from the pending storage buffer and executes the jackpot determination module (S9061). In this case, the CPU 9056 reads the big hit determination random number extracted in S901216 of the starting opening switch passage processing or S901227 of the starting opening switch passage processing and stored in advance in the first pending storage buffer or the second pending storage buffer to determine the big hit. Do. The jackpot determination module is a program that executes a process of comparing a predetermined jackpot determination value (see FIG. 27) with a jackpot determination random number, and determining that the jackpot is a jackpot if they match. That is, it is a program that executes a big hit determination process.

  In the jackpot determination process, the probability that the jackpot will be higher when the gaming state is the probability variation state (high probability state) is higher than that when the gaming state is the non-determination variation state (normal game state). Specifically, the probability variation big hit determination table in which a large number of big hit determination values are set in advance (a table in which the numerical values on the right side of FIG. 27A in ROM 9054 are set) and the number of big hit determination values An ordinary jackpot determination table (a table in which the numerical values on the left side of FIG. 27A in ROM 9054 are set) that are set to be smaller than the hour jackpot determination table is provided. Then, the CPU 9056 confirms whether or not the gaming state is the probability variation state, and when the gaming state is the probability variation state, performs the jackpot determination process using the probability variation big hit determination table, and the gaming state is the normal game. When it is in a state or in a short time state, the big hit determination table is used to perform the big hit determination. That is, the CPU 9056 determines that the special symbol is a big hit when the value of the random number for big hit determination (random R′) matches any of the big hit determination values shown in FIG. 27(A). When it is decided to make a big hit (Y in S9061), the process proceeds to S9071. In addition, to decide whether or not to be a big hit, it is to decide whether or not to shift to the big hit gaming state, but to decide whether or not to make a stop symbol in the special symbol display device a big hit symbol But also.

  The confirmation as to whether or not the current game state is the probability variation state is performed by whether or not the probability variation flag is set. The probability variation flag is set when shifting the game state to the probability variation state, and reset when ending the probability variation state. Specifically, the probability variation flag is set in the jackpot end process (S90307 in FIG. 32) when the probability variation big hit is generated, and then the next big hit is determined, or a variation display that is a deviant display result. When a condition that a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) has been executed is satisfied, the variable display of the special symbol is ended and the stop symbol is reset at the timing of stop display.

  If the value of the big hit determination random number (random R′) does not match any of the big hit determination values (N of S9061), the process proceeds to S9075 described later.

  If the value of the random number for random determination (random R') in S9061 matches any of the jackpot determination values, the CPU 9056 sets a jackpot flag indicating that it is a jackpot (S9071). The jackpot flag is reset when the jackpot game is over. Then, as a table used to determine the jackpot type into any of a plurality of types, the first special symbol jackpot type determination table of FIG. 27(B) and the second special symbol jackpot type of FIG. 27(C) One of the determination tables is selected (S9072). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 9056 selects the first special symbol big hit type determination table shown in FIG. 27(B). Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the CPU 9056 selects the second special symbol big hit type determination table of FIG. 27(C).

  Next, the CPU 9056 reads out the jackpot type determination random number extracted in the starting opening switch passage process and stored in the first holding storage buffer or the second holding storage buffer in advance, and holds it by using the jackpot type determination table selected in S9072. The big hit type and the big hit symbol corresponding to the value that matches the value of the random number (random 1') for big hit type determination stored in the storage buffer are determined (S9073).

  As shown in FIGS. 27(B) and (C), for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the relationship between the big hit type and the big hit symbol is set so that the big hit symbol is different for each big hit type, Since the big hit type and the big hit symbol are determined at the same time, the correspondence relationship between the big hit symbol and the game control according to the big hit type is simplified, so that the game control can be prevented from becoming complicated.

  Further, the CPU 9056 sets big hit type data indicating the decided big hit type in the big hit type buffer in the RAM 9055 (S9074). For example, when the big hit type is "normal big hit", "01" is set as big hit type data. When the big hit type is “probable variation big hit”, “02” is set as big hit type data.

  Next, the CPU 9056 sets a stop symbol of the special symbol (S9075). Specifically, when the big hit flag is not set, "-" which is a falling symbol is set as a stop symbol of the special symbol. When the big hit flag is set, the big hit design decided by S9073 is set to the stop design of the special design according to the big hit classification decision result. That is, when the jackpot type is determined to be the "probable variation jackpot", "7" is set as the stop symbol of the special symbol. When the jackpot type is determined to be "normal jackpot", "3" is determined as a stop symbol of the special symbol.

  Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (S90301) (S9076).

  In the above-mentioned display result designation command transmission process (S90302), the CPU 9056 designates one of the display result 1 designation command to the display result 3 designation command which designates the display result in accordance with the determined jackpot type or the deviation. The control for transmitting the production control command (see FIG. 29) is performed.

  Further, in the special symbol variation process (S90303) described above, the CPU 9056 subtracts 1 from the variation time timer, and when the variation time timer times out, the value of the special symbol process flag corresponds to the special symbol stop process (S90304). The value is updated, and the process proceeds to the special symbol stop process.

  As a result of the variable display, when it is a big hit, the big winning opening opening pre-processing (S90305), the big winning opening opening processing (S90306), and the big winning ending processing (S90307) are executed to control the big hit gaming state. To be done. In the jackpot end process (S90307), the probability variation flag and the time saving flag are set at the end of the probability variation big hit, and the time saving flag is set at the end of the normal jackpot. As a result, after the probability variation big hit ends, the probability variation state and the time saving state are controlled, and after the normal big hit ends, the time variation state is controlled.

  The probability variation big hit and the time-shortening state after the normal big hit must be continued until one of the conditions, that is, until the variable display is executed 100 times or until the next big hit occurs. The duration of such variable display 100 times is set to 100 times in the jackpot end process (S90307), which is the number of times the special symbol can be changed in the time saving state, and thereafter, the variable display is executed. The special symbol stop process is managed by subtracting and updating, and the time saving flag is reset on the basis of the time saving counter being incremented, whereby control for ending the time saving state is performed.

  Next, the operation of the effect control microcomputer 90100 will be described. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the production control main processing executed by the production control microcomputer 90100 (specifically, the production control CPU 90101) mounted on the production control board 9080.

  When the power is turned on, the effect control CPU 90101 starts execution of effect control main processing. In the effect control main processing, first, initialization processing is performed for clearing the RAM area, setting various initial values, and initializing a timer for determining the activation interval (for example, 2 ms) of effect control (S90701). ). After that, the effect control CPU 90101 shifts to the loop processing for monitoring the timer interrupt flag (S90702). When a timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 90101 sets a timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. If the timer interrupt flag is set in the effect control main processing, the effect control CPU 90101 clears the flag (S90703) and executes the following effect control processing.

  In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 90101 first analyzes the received effect control command, and sets data such as a flag that can specify what the received effect control command is a command to instruct. Processing (for example, processing for storing data that can specify the received command in various command storage areas provided in the RAM 90103) is performed (command analysis processing: S90704). Next, the effect control CPU 90101 performs effect control process processing (S90705). In the effect control process process, in order to perform various effects such as variable display of effect symbols on the effect display device 909 in accordance with the content of the effect control command analyzed in S90704, the current control among the processes according to the control state is performed. A process corresponding to the state (production control process flag) is selected to execute production control.

  Next, random numbers used by the production control microcomputer 90100 (SR1-1' for determining the left stop symbol of the production symbol, SR1-2' for determining the middle stop symbol of the production symbol, SR1 for determining the right stop symbol of the production symbol) -3', SR2' for area effect execution determination, SR3' for area effect execution timing determination, SR4' for first area effect determination, SR5' for second area effect determination) A random number update process for updating the count value is executed (S90706). Each of such random numbers SR1-1′ to SR5′ is generated by the count of a random counter that updates the count value by software, is cyclically updated within a predetermined range for each, and It is used as a random number by being extracted at a specified timing.

  Next, a hold storage display control process for controlling the display state of the hold display in the hold display area (moving, deleting, etc. of the hold display) is executed (S90707).

  By performing such effect control main processing, in the effect control microcomputer 90100, the effect display device 909, various lamps, and, depending on the effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 90560 and received. By controlling the effect devices such as the speakers 9027L and 9027R, various effect controls according to the gaming state are performed.

  FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the effect control process process (S90705) in the effect control main process shown in FIG. In the effect control process process, the effect control CPU 90101 determines whether to execute the prefetch effect, and executes the prefetch effect process (S90500) for selecting the type of the prefetch effect, and then the value of the effect control process flag. According to the above, any one of S90800 to S90807 is performed.

  In the production control process processing, the following processing is executed. In the production control process processing, the display state of the production display device 909 is controlled and the variable display of the production symbol is realized, but the control regarding the variable display of the production symbol in synchronization with the variation of the first special symbol is also the second special symbol. The control related to the variable display of the effect design in synchronization with the change of is also executed in one effect control process process.

  The pre-reading effect process (S90500) is a process of performing pre-reading determination such as whether to execute the pre-reading effect, and determining an effect mode when the pre-reading effect is executed. Look-ahead production is, before the order of the variable display (symbol fluctuation) of the special symbol based on certain reserved information (reserved storage information) comes, the reserved information is pre-read and the fluctuation of the special symbol based on the reserved information. It is a production technique such as judging the contents of the display and giving an advance notice in advance of how the variable display of the future special symbol will be. For example, when the hold information is a big hit, before the variable display by the hold information is executed, the big hit may occur afterwards based on the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the hold information. An effect such as giving a notice is performed as a look-ahead effect. Hereinafter, the variable display based on the hold information that is the target of the prefetching effect is referred to as “target variable display”.

  The variation pattern command reception waiting process (S90800) is a process of confirming whether or not the variation pattern command is received from the game control microcomputer 90560. If the variation pattern command has been received, the process proceeds to effect symbol variation start processing.

  The effect symbol variation start process (S90801) is a process for controlling so that the variable display of the effect symbol (decorative symbol) is started. The effect symbol fluctuating process (S90802) is a process of controlling the switching timing of each fluctuation state (fluctuation speed) that constitutes the fluctuation pattern. The effect symbol variation stop process (S90803) is a process of stopping the variable display of the effect symbol (decorative symbol) and deriving and displaying the display result (final stop symbol) of the variable symbol.

  The big hit display process (S90804) is a process of performing display control such as control for displaying a fanfare effect for notifying the effect display device 909 of the occurrence of the big hit after the end of the variable time. The in-round processing (S90805) is processing for performing display control during the round. When the round end condition is satisfied, if the final round has not ended, the process proceeds to round post-processing, and if the final round has ended, the jackpot end process proceeds. The post-round process (S90806) is a process for performing display control between rounds. When the round start condition is satisfied, the process moves to the in-round process. The big hit end effect process (S90807) is a process of performing display control for notifying the player that the big hit game state has ended on the effect display device 909.

  The effect control CPU 90101 stores the process in the ROM 90102 during the predetermined effect control period from the start of the variable display to the stop of the variable display and from the start of the big hit game state to the end of the big hit game state. The production device (production parts) such as the production display device 909 is controlled according to the process data set in the table.

  The process table is composed of process timer set values and data in which a plurality of combinations of display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data are collected. In the display control execution data, data and the like indicating the form of each variation that constitutes the variation mode during the variation time (variation display time) of the variation display of the effect design (decoration pattern) are described. Specifically, the data related to the change of the display screen of the effect display device 9 is described. Further, the process timer set value is set with the change time in the form of the change. The effect control CPU 90101 refers to the process table, and performs control to display effect symbols in a variation mode set in the display control execution data only for the time set in the process timer set value. Such a process table is prepared according to each variation pattern.

  FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol variation start process (S90801) in the effect control process process. In the effect symbol variation start process, the effect control CPU 90101 performs the following process.

  In the effect symbol variation start processing, it is confirmed whether or not it is determined that the variation display result is out of alignment (S90601). Whether or not it is determined to be out is determined by, for example, whether or not the display result 1 designation command is stored in the display result designation command storage area. If it is determined to be out of alignment, it is confirmed whether or not a command corresponding to the non-reach fluctuation pattern is received as the fluctuation pattern command (S90602). Whether or not the command corresponding to the non-reach fluctuation pattern is received is determined by, for example, the data stored in the fluctuation pattern command storage area.

  If it is determined that the command corresponding to the non-reach variation pattern is received, the display result of the outlier that does not reach is determined as the final stop of the effect symbol using the outlier symbol determination data table stored in the ROM 90102 (S90604). , And advances to S90616. In the falling symbol determination data table, numerical data of SR1-1′ to SR1-3′ is associated with each of the plurality of types of effect symbols.

  In the process of S90604, numerical data (random numbers) are extracted from each of SR1-1′ to SR1-3′ at a predetermined timing, and the outlier symbol determination data table is used, and the symbols corresponding to the extracted numerical data are left. , Middle, right is determined as a combination of stop symbols that result in variable display of the effect symbols. In this way, when determining a combination of non-reach outliers, if the stop symbol corresponding to the extracted random number happens to coincide with the combination of the jackpot symbols, it is corrected to be a combination of outliers (for example, Each stop symbol is determined by correcting the right symbol by shifting it by one symbol). In addition, when the stop symbol corresponding to the extracted random number accidentally becomes a reach symbol, correction is made so as to be a combination of non-reach deviating symbols (for example, correction by shifting the right symbol by one symbol) and each stop symbol. Is determined.

  When it is determined that it is not the non-reach variation pattern in the process of S90602 (when it is determined to be the reach variation pattern), the stop symbol of the effect symbol forming the reach symbol combination is determined (S90605), and the process proceeds to S90616. In the process of S90605, numerical data (random number) is extracted from each of SR1-1′ to SR1-3′ at a predetermined timing, and the outlier symbol determination data table is used to correspond to the random number extracted from SR1-1′. The symbol to be formed is determined as the stop symbol of each of the left and right effect symbols forming the reach state, and the symbol corresponding to the random number that matches the value of the counter extracted from SR1-2' is determined as the stop symbol of the middle symbol. It Further, also in this case, when it happens to be a combination of big hit symbols, each stop symbol is determined by correcting so as to be a combination of outlying symbols (for example, correction by shifting the middle symbol by one symbol).

  In addition, when it is not determined in the process of S90601 to be a deviation (when it is determined to be a big hit) (N in S90601), the effect control CPU 90101 determines whether the big hit symbol is in accordance with the type of the big hit. The stop symbols of the effect symbols forming the combination are determined (S90603), and the process proceeds to S90616.

  In S90603, the combination of winning symbols is determined according to the type of big hit as follows. Based on which of the display result 2 designation command and the display result 3 designation command is stored in the display result specific command storage area, the jackpot type is selected from the probability variation jackpot and the normal jackpot. When it is determined that it is decided to make a probability variation jackpot, numerical data (random number) is extracted from SR1-1′ at a predetermined timing, and a combination of SR1-1′ and a probability variation jackpot symbol (for example, Using the data table (probability variation big hit symbol determination table) in which the relationship with the left, middle, and right is an odd number of doublet stitch combinations such as "7, 7, 7,") The combination of big hit symbols is selected and determined. Further, when it is determined that it is determined to be a normal big hit, numerical data (random number) is extracted from SR1-1' at a predetermined timing, and a combination of SR1-1' and a normal big hit symbol (for example, left, Middle, right is a combination of even-numbered ditches such as "4, 4, 4") and the data table (normal big hit symbol determination table) is used to set the relation, and one of the normal big hit symbols is extracted from the extracted values. The combination of is selected and determined. The symbol thus determined is used as the final stop symbol which is the variable display result before being controlled to the big hit game state.

  Next, processing for setting various effects in variable display (for example, effect of variable display of effect symbols (including variable display mode such as pseudo-relation), and processing for setting various effects such as prefetch effect) After performing the effect setting process (S90616) to be performed, the process proceeds to S90617.

  In S90617, the effect control pattern is determined to be one of a plurality of types of effect control patterns. In S90617, the pattern variation control pattern table according to the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command, and various effect control (effect operation) patterns designated by the effect control pattern of the effect determined in the process of S90616. Of the plural types of symbol variation control patterns stored in, the production control pattern corresponding to any of the specified various production operation patterns is selected and determined as the use pattern.

  In the control pattern table stored in the ROM 90102, for example, the fluctuation of the effect symbol in the effect display device 909 during the period from the start of the fluctuation of the effect symbol until the final effect symbol which is the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed. A plurality of types of data are stored as a symbol variation control pattern, which are the control contents of various production operations such as a display operation, an effect display operation in a reach effect, an effect display operation by a pseudo-representation effect, and an effect display operation in a notice effect.

  Further, each symbol variation control pattern, for example, production control process timer set value, production control process timer judgment value, production display control data, voice control data, lamp control data, and end code, such as display variation display It includes control data for controlling various production operations in accordance with the contents, and the contents of various production controls, the timing of production control switching, and the like are set in time series.

  Next, a process table corresponding to the effect control pattern selected in S90617 is selected (S90618). Then, the process timer (production setting process timer) in the process data 1 of the selected process table is started (S90619).

  After the processing of S90619 is executed, the effect device (effect display device 909, various lamps, speaker 9027, etc.) is controlled according to the contents of process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1). Is started (S90620). For example, according to the display control execution data, a command is output to the VDP 90109 in order to display an image (including the effect symbol) according to the variation pattern on the effect display device 909. A control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp driver board 9035 in order to perform lighting/extinguishing control of the light emitting bodies such as various LEDs. Also, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the sound output board 9070 in order to output sound from the speaker 9027.

  Then, in the variation display time timer, a value corresponding to the variation time specified by the variation pattern command is set (S90621), and the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation process (S90802). A symbol variation start process is executed (S90622).

[First example of timer effect]
Next, a first example of the timer effect will be described. As a first example of the timer effect, a predetermined display performs a predetermined operation to display a specific mode, and when the predetermined display becomes the specific mode, one of the plurality of specific effects is selected. An example of effect control to be executed will be described.

  As the "display in which the predetermined display is in a specific mode in which a predetermined operation is performed", a display in which the timer numerical value display performs a time counting operation and is in a time counting end mode is displayed as in the timer display. As the “effect of executing one of the specific effects of the plurality of types of specific effects when the predetermined display is in the specific mode”, a predetermined image is displayed when the timer display is in the time counting end mode. By doing so, an effect of executing any one of a plurality of kinds of expectation suggestion display effects that suggest an expectation level that is advantageous for the player is provided. As an example of the predetermined image in that case, for example, in order to suggest that something happens to the player, a character indicating a predetermined indication such as “READY GO” or “START” is displayed. Alternatively, an action display or the like may be displayed using a predetermined character image. Further, either one of the character display and the action table may be executed, or both of them may be executed. It should be noted that, as “the effect of executing one of the specific effects of a plurality of types of specific effects when the predetermined display is in the specific mode”, a predetermined image is displayed after the timekeeping end mode is displayed. Alternatively, the specific effect may be executed.

  FIG. 38 is a timing chart showing the performance execution timing of the first example of the timer performance. FIG. 38A shows an example of performance execution timing in a predetermined fluctuation pattern in which the timer performance can be executed a plurality of times during one fluctuation display. FIG. 38(B) shows an example of performance execution timing of the first performance in FIG. 38(A). FIG. 38(C) shows an example of performance execution timing of the third performance of FIG. 38(A).

  As shown in FIG. 38(A), for example, in the variable display of the specific super reach such as the above-mentioned fourth super reach, the first effect, the second effect, and the third effect capable of executing the timer effect. Multiple types of effects are executed during one variable display. The lengths of the execution periods of the plurality of types of effects are set in a long/short relationship of “first effect<second effect<third effect”. In the first effect, the second effect, and the third effect, when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the effect period, a selection is made from a plurality of types of specific effects such as a plurality of types of expectation suggestion display effects. The rendered effect is executed.

  With respect to the first effect, the second effect, and the third effect, a case where the timer effect is executed and a case where the timer effect is not executed are selected by lottery. The effect mode is referred to as "effect", and the case where the timer effect is not executed is referred to as "no timer effect" to distinguish the effect modes.

  In FIG. 38(B), for the first effect shown in FIG. 38(A), (B1) shows the effect execution timing when the timer is included, and (B2) is the effect execution timing when the timer is not included. It is shown. In the first effect shown in FIG. 38(B), the effect period is shorter than that of the other effects, and the background color suggesting the expectation degree of the jackpot as the expectation suggestion display when 25 seconds have elapsed from the start of the effect period. The effect of displaying the image is performed.

  The background color refers to the image color of the background image forming the background of the effect design among the images displayed on the effect display device 9. The background color is a color (for example, yellow) other than blue and red before the first effect is executed. In the first effect, 25 seconds from the start of the effect period (first effect period) of the first effect in both the effect with timer shown in (B1) and the effect without timer in (B2). As time passes, an effect of changing the background color to red (red background) or blue (blue background) is performed as an expectation suggestion display. The relationship of “blue background<red background” is set for the high expectation of the big hit depending on the background color displayed in the expectation suggestion display. Which of the timer effect and the timer-free effect is executed when the first effect is executed is determined by a lottery common to the first effect to the third effect before the start of the variable display, and the second effect and the third effect. It is decided together with.

  When the effect with timer of FIG. 38(B1) is executed, the image of the timer display is displayed and 25 seconds are counted from the start of the first effect. When the time remaining on the timer displayed by the timer display reaches 0 seconds and the timer ends, the accessory 9012 moves up and down according to the end, and the expectation level indication indicates that the jackpot is a big hit. Depending on the expected degree, either the red background or the blue background is selected, and the effect of changing the background image color is executed.

  When the timer no-effect of FIG. 38(B2) is executed, the timer display image is not displayed. When 25 seconds elapse from the start of the first effect, the accessory 9012 is abruptly moved up and down, and a blue background is selected and an effect of changing the background image color is executed as the expectation indication. It

  In the timer effect and the timer non-effect when executing the first effect, the same image is displayed as an image other than the timer display for 25 seconds from the start of the first effect. It should be noted that, for 25 seconds after the start of the first effect, as the image other than the timer display, a part of the image with the timer effect and the image without the timer may be displayed.

  In the first effect, the interestingness of the effect can be improved by performing the expectation suggestion display after a lapse of a predetermined period from the start of the effect. Since the expectation indication is displayed in correspondence with the progress of the timer effect, the fun of the effect can be further improved. By performing the operation of the accessory 9012 in response to the end of the time display on the timer display, the fun of the effect can be further improved. Since the expectation suggestion display having a higher expectation is executed in a higher proportion in the timer effect, the player's expectation when the timer effect is executed can be increased.

  It should be noted that when the timer no effect is executed, the expectation suggestion display may be disabled. Also, only the red background is displayed when the timer effect is executed, and either the red background or the blue background is selected and displayed in accordance with the degree of expectation of a big hit when the timer effect is executed. You may do it. Further, the relationship of the high degree of expectation by the expectation suggestion display between the effect with timer and the effect without timer may be opposite to the above-described relationship (no timer effect>with timer effect).

  In FIG. 38(C), for the third effect shown in FIG. 38(A), (C1) shows the effect execution timing when the effect is provided by the timer, and (C2) is the effect execution timing when the timer is not effected. It is shown. In the third effect shown in FIG. 38(C), the effect period is longer than that of other effects such as the first effect, and at the time of 60 seconds from the start of the effect period, the expectation of a big hit as an expectation suggestion display. The effect of displaying the image of the operation means that indicates the degree is performed. In the third effect shown in FIG. 38(C), effect control is performed so that the operation effect is executed more frequently than other effects such as the first effect.

  The operation means is an operation means provided in a pattern such as the push button 90120 and the stick controller 90122 and operable by the player. In the third effect, 60 seconds from the start of the effect period of the third effect (third effect period) in both the effect with timer of FIG. 38(C1) and the effect without timer of (C2). When the time elapses, an effect of displaying the image of the stick controller or the image of the push button is performed as the expectation indication. The effect is also an operation promotion effect immediately before displaying the variable display result. When the operation means displayed during the effect is executed, the effect in which the variable display result is derived and displayed is executed.

  The relationship of "push button <stick controller" is set for the high expectation of the big hit by the operating means displayed in the expectation suggestion display. Which of the timer effect and the timer-free effect is executed when executing the third effect is determined by a lottery common to the first effect to the third effect before the start of the variable display, and the first effect and the second effect. It is decided together with.

  When the effect with timer of FIG. 38(C1) is executed, the image of the timer display is displayed, and 60 seconds are counted from the start of the third effect. When the time remaining on the timer displayed by the timer display is 0 seconds and the timer has finished counting, the image of the stick controller and the push button are displayed in accordance with the expectation that the jackpot is expected, as the expectation of a big hit. Is selected and the effect displayed in the center of the screen is executed.

  When the timer non-effect of FIG. 38(C2) is executed, the timer display image is not displayed. When 60 seconds have elapsed from the start of the third effect, the effect of unexpectedly selecting and displaying the image of the push button is executed as the expectation indication.

  In the timer effect and the non-timer effect when executing the third effect, the same image is displayed as an image other than the timer display and the operation effect display for 60 seconds from the start of the third effect. Is displayed. It should be noted that during the period from the start of the third effect to 60 seconds, as the image displayed in addition to the display of the timer and the operation effect, a part of the image with the timer effect and the image without the timer is displayed. Good.

  In the third effect, in the timer effect, a plurality of times of the first operation effect to the fifth operation effect are repeated at a constant period T (10 seconds) in a period from the start of the third effect to the elapse of 60 seconds. There is a case where the operation effect of is executed. The operation effect is also referred to as a motion corresponding effect, and when a predetermined operation means is operated by a player's operation within a predetermined detection effective period, a predetermined effect such as image display corresponding to the operation is executed. Is a production. The operation effect in the third effect can be executed at a specific ratio, as shown in FIG. On the other hand, in the third effect, there is no case where the operation effect that is executed with the timer is not executed in the timer-less effect.

  As the operation effects, five types of operation effects, that is, a first operation effect to a fifth operation effect are executed. The first operation effect displays an image that promotes the operation of the push button 90120 (hereinafter referred to as a button operation promotion display), and accordingly, corresponds to the operation of the push button 90120 within a predetermined operation valid period. It is a production that displays an opportunity. The chance display means displaying an image that suggests that the player has a chance. The second operation effect is an operation effect display in which the button operation promotion display is performed and the reach display is performed in response to the push button 90120 being operated within a predetermined operation effective period. The reach display refers to displaying an image that suggests that the reach state is reached.

  In the third operation effect, an image that promotes the operation of the stick controller 90122 is displayed (hereinafter referred to as stick operation promotion display), and accordingly, the stick controller 90122 is operated within a predetermined operation valid period. , SP display. SP display refers to displaying an image that suggests that super-reach will be achieved. The fourth operation effect is an operation in which the button operation promotion display is performed and the expectation degree% display is performed corresponding to the push button 90120 being operated within a predetermined operation effective period. The expectation degree% display means to display an image that suggests the percentage of being in the big hit game state by this variation display. The fifth operation effect is an effect in which a stick operation promotion display is performed and, in response to the operation, the stick controller 90122 is operated within a predetermined operation effective period to display intense heat. The intense heat display means to display an image that suggests that the variation display this time is extremely high (extremely high) in expectation of being in the big hit game state.

  Although the illustration content of the second effect is omitted, for example, when the timer effect is executed, an image of a timer display is displayed and 40 seconds are counted from the start of the second effect. When the time remaining on the timer displayed by the timer display is 0 seconds and the timer has finished counting, a plurality of types of jackpot notice characters (first notice character, first notice character, 2) The character for notice selected from the images of (2) Character for notice is displayed at a predetermined position. For example, with respect to the high expectation level for the big notice of the notice character displayed in the expectation suggestion display of the second effect, the relation of "first notice character <second notice character" is set. Which of the timer effect and the timer-free effect is executed when the second effect is executed is determined by a lottery common to the first effect to the third effect before the start of the variable display, and the first effect and the third effect. It is decided together with.

  In addition, as shown in FIGS. 40C and 40D, each of the first effect and the second effect can be executed in the third effect at a predetermined ratio (a different ratio) when the timer effect is applied. It is possible to execute the same effect as a simple operation effect.

  In the third effect, the fun of the effect can be improved by performing the expectation suggestion display after a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the effect. Since the expectation indication is displayed in correspondence with the progress of the timer effect, the fun of the effect can be further improved. By performing the operation of the accessory 9012 in response to the end of the time display on the timer display, the fun of the effect can be further improved. Since the expectation suggestion display having a higher expectation is executed in a higher proportion in the timer effect, the player's expectation when the timer effect is executed can be increased.

  In addition, in the third effect, a plurality of operation effects in which the player can intervene by operation are executed in accordance with the progress of the timer effect, so that the player's motivation to participate in the game can be increased, and the game can be enhanced. The interest of can be improved.

  Further, in the third effect, in the timer effect, the first operation effect to the fifth operation effect are called at regular intervals T (10 seconds) in the period from the start of the third effect to the elapse of 60 seconds. Since the operation effect may be performed a plurality of times, it is possible to reduce boredom of the player when a relatively long time is displayed in the timer display.

  Further, in the third effect, it is possible to execute an operation corresponding effect corresponding to an operation of different operation means, such as an operation effect corresponding to a button operation and an operation effect corresponding to a stick operation, depending on a timer period. Therefore, the boredom of the player can be further reduced.

  The expectation suggestion display may not be selectable when the timer non-effect is executed. Also, only the red background is displayed when the timer effect is executed, and either the red background or the blue background is selected and displayed in accordance with the degree of expectation of a big hit when the timer effect is executed. You may do it. Further, the relationship of the high degree of expectation by the expectation suggestion display between the effect with timer and the effect without timer may be opposite to the above-described relationship (no timer effect>with timer effect).

  Next, the effect image of the third effect will be described as an example of the effect image displayed on the effect display device 909 in the timer effect. FIG. 39 is a display screen diagram showing an effect image of the third effect when the timer effect is executed. 39(A) to (L), an example of an image displayed on the effect display device 9 in the third effect is shown over time. In FIG. 39, images having little relation to timer effects such as hold display are omitted.

  In FIG. 39, the left, middle, and right effect symbols 9091, 9092, and 9093 are indicated by downward arrows in the state of variable display. When the variable display is executed on the effect display device 909, the variable display of the left, middle, and right effect symbols 9091, 9092, and 9093 is started at the center of the screen. When the timer effect is executed, a timer display area 9094 for displaying a timer by a numerical value in the timer effect, an operation promotion display, an operation correspondence display, and the like in the timer effect are displayed in the lower right part of the display area of the effect display device 909. An operation effect display area 95 for displaying an image related to the operation effect is formed (provided).

  In the third effect, when 10 seconds have elapsed from the time when the timer display started, as shown in FIG. 39(A), the display value in the timer display area 9094 remains 50 seconds, and accordingly, the operation effect display area 9095 is displayed. A button image imitating the push button 90120 and a character image of “press!” are displayed as a button operation promotion image for promoting the operation of the push button 90120. The button operation promotion image is displayed for a predetermined period of 10 seconds or less until the operation of the push button 90120 is detected.

  When the player's operation of the push button 90120 is detected according to the operation prompting display of FIG. 39(A), as shown in FIG. 39(B), according to the operation correspondence display of the correspondence shown in FIG. A chance display is performed in which a character image "Chance" is displayed.

  When 20 seconds have elapsed from the start of timing of the timer display, as shown in FIG. 39C, the display value in the timer display area 9094 remains 40 seconds, and accordingly, the push button 90120 in the operation effect display area 9095. A button image that imitates and a character image "Press!" are displayed as the button operation promotion image. The button operation promotion image is displayed for a predetermined period of 10 seconds or less until the operation of the push button 90120 is detected.

  When the player's operation of the push button 90120 is detected in response to the operation prompting display of FIG. 39(C), as shown in FIG. 39(D), according to the operation correspondence display of the correspondence shown in FIG. The reach display in which the character image "Reach" is displayed is executed, and the effect symbols 9091, 9092, and 9093 are in the reach display mode.

  When 30 seconds have elapsed from the start of counting the time on the timer display, as shown in FIG. 39(E), the display value in the timer display area 9094 remains 30 seconds, and accordingly, the stick controller 90122 is displayed in the operation effect display area 9095. The stick image imitating the symbol and the character image of “withdraw!” are displayed as the stick operation promotion image for promoting the operation of the stick controller 90122. The stick operation promotion image is displayed for a predetermined period of 10 seconds or less until the operation of the stick controller 90122 is detected.

  When the player's operation of the stick controller 90122 is detected according to the operation prompting display of FIG. 39(E), as shown in FIG. 39(F), according to the operation correspondence display of the correspondence shown in FIG. SP display in which the character image "SP" is displayed is executed, and the SP character image 9096 used for the SP effect is displayed in the center of the screen. In the SP effect character image 9096, an ally character (a character on the left side) that is a friend of the player and an enemy character (a character on the right side) that is an enemy of the player are displayed in a battle (fight) battle effect mode. In the battle production, the jackpot display result is derived and displayed when the teammate character wins, and the shift display result is derived and displayed when the teammate character loses. When the battle effect is executed, the effect symbols 9091, 9092, and 9093 are reduced and moved to the upper right corner of the screen, and the variable display is continued at the destination position.

  When 40 seconds have elapsed from the start of timing of the timer display, as shown in FIG. 39(G), the display value in the timer display area 9094 remains 20 seconds, and accordingly, the push button 90120 in the operation effect display area 9095. A button image that imitates and a character image "Press!" are displayed as the button operation promotion image. The button operation promotion image is displayed for a predetermined period of 10 seconds or less until the operation of the push button 90120 is detected.

  When the player's operation of the push button 90120 is detected according to the operation prompting display of FIG. 39(G), as shown in FIG. 39(H), according to the operation correspondence display of the correspondence shown in FIG. The expectation% display in which the character image "80%" is displayed is executed, and the battle effect is continued.

  When 50 seconds have elapsed from the start of counting the timer display, as shown in FIG. 39(I), the display value in the timer display area 94 remains 10 seconds, and accordingly, the stick controller 90122 in the operation effect display area 95. A stick image that imitates "," and a character image of "withdraw!" are displayed as a stick operation promotion image. The stick operation promotion image is displayed for a predetermined period of 10 seconds or less until the operation of the stick controller 90122 is detected.

  When the player's operation of the stick controller 90122 is detected according to the operation prompting display of FIG. 39(I), as shown in FIG. 39(J), according to the operation correspondence display of the correspondence shown in FIG. The intense heat display in which the character image of "extreme heat" is displayed is executed, and the battle effect is continued.

  When 60 seconds have elapsed from the start of counting the time on the timer display, as shown in FIG. 39(K), the display value in the timer display area 9094 remains 0 seconds, and the stick controller 90122 is imitated in the center of the screen. An expectation suggestion display 9097 consisting of a stick image and a character image of "withdraw!" is displayed. The expectation suggestion display 9097 is displayed for a predetermined period of 10 seconds or less until the operation of the stick controller 90122 is detected.

  When the player's operation of the stick controller 90122 is detected according to the expectation suggestion display 9097 of FIG. 39(K), when the jackpot display result is obtained, the teammate character wins the battle effect and the correspondence relationship shown in FIG. In accordance with the operation corresponding display of, the effect of deriving and displaying the variable display result of the big hit display result is executed as shown in FIG. On the other hand, when the display result is off, the teammate character is defeated in the battle effect, and the effect of deriving and displaying the variable display result of the off display result is executed.

  Next, when performing the variable display of the variation pattern of a specific super reach, selection of whether or not to execute the timer effect, and the operation effects in the first effect to the third effect when executing the timer effect. A data table used in the lottery for selecting whether or not to execute is described.

  FIG. 40 is an explanatory diagram showing a fourth super reach timer effect selection table, a first effect operation effect selection table, a second effect operation effect selection table, and a third effect operation effect selection table. These data tables are stored in the ROM 90102 of the effect control microcomputer 90100. The selection ratio of the effect described below may include a ratio that is not selected at all (0 ratio (0%)), and in the description of the size relation of the selection ratio of the effect, the ratio is “small”. May include a case where the selection ratio is “0% (0%)”. On the contrary, in the description of the size relation of the selection ratio of the effect, the example in which the ratio is “large” may include the case where the selection ratio is “100% (100%)”.

  The fourth super reach timer effect selection table is for selecting whether to execute a timer display effect or a timer display non-effect when executing the variation pattern of the fourth super reach which is a specific super reach. Used for lottery. The fourth super reach timer effect selection table and the big hit fourth super reach timer effect selection table of FIG. 40(A) used when the variable display result becomes the big hit display result are different from the variable display result. 40B, which is used at this time, is included in the out-of-difference fourth super reach timer effect selection table.

  In the tables of FIGS. 40A and 40B, a total of 100 random number SR2' (numerical value range of 0 to 99) for timer effect selection as one of the random numbers updated by the effect control microcomputer 90100. Numerical values are allocated to the effect with timer display and the effect without timer display. For SR2′, the number of allocated random number SR2′ values is shown for the sake of clarity.

  In the big hit fourth super-reach timer effect selection table of FIG. 40(A), the timer is set so that the value of SR2′ extracted at a predetermined timing is “timer display effect> timer display non-effect”. The data is set such that the rate at which the determination to execute the display effect is selected is higher. On the other hand, in the out-going fourth super reach timer effect selection table of FIG. 40(B), the value of SR2′ extracted at a predetermined timing causes the relationship of “timer display existence effect<timer display non-effect” to be large or small. The data is set such that the rate at which the decision to execute the timer display non-effect is selected is higher.

  By setting the data in FIGS. 40(A) and 40(B) as described above, when the variable display result is the big hit display result, it is determined that the timer display effect is to be executed, as compared with when the variable display result is the deviant display result. Becomes higher. As a result, when the timer display effect is executed, the player's expectation for a big hit can be increased as compared with when the timer display effect is not executed.

  The operation effect selection table of the first effect shown in FIG. 40C is obtained when execution of the timer display effect is selected using the fourth super reach timer effect selection table of FIGS. 40A and 40B. , Is used for a lottery for selecting whether or not to execute the operation effect of the first effect. The operation effect selection table for the second effect in FIG. 40(C) is when the execution with the timer display effect is selected using the fourth super reach timer effect selection table in FIGS. 40(A) and (B). , Is used for a lottery for selecting whether or not to execute the operation effect of the second effect. The operation effect selection table for the third effect in FIG. 40D is obtained when execution of the timer display effect is selected using the fourth super reach timer effect selection table in FIGS. 40A and 40B. , Is used for a lottery for selecting whether or not to execute the operation effect of the third effect.

  In each of the tables of FIGS. 40C to 40E, a total of 110 random numbers SR3′ (numerical value range of 0 to 109) for operation effect presence/absence selection are selected as one of the random numbers updated by the effect control microcomputer 90100. The numerical value of is allocated with the operation effect and without the operation effect. For SR3′, the number of allocated random number SR3′ values is shown for clarity of explanation.

  In the operation effect selection table of the first effect of FIG. 40C, the operation effect absence is selected so that the value relationship of SR3′ extracted at a predetermined timing has a relationship of “operation effect existence<operation effect absence”. The data is set so that the rate of being done is higher. In the operation effect selection table for the second effect in FIG. 40D, the operation effect is present and the operation is performed so that the value of SR3′ extracted at a predetermined timing has a size relation of “operation effect present=no operation effect”. The data is set so that "without performance" is selected at the same rate. In the operation effect selection table for the third effect in FIG. 40(E), the operation effect existence is selected so that the value relationship SR3′ extracted at a predetermined timing has a size relation of “operation effect existence>no operation effect”. The data is set so that the rate of being done is higher. With such a table, in the first effect to the third effect, the data is set such that the longer the effect period is, the higher the ratio of the operation effect existence is selected.

  As shown in the table in FIG. 40C, in the first effect in which the timer display is performed for 25 seconds, the total value of the number of operations when the operation effect is selected is 1, that is, 1 in 25 seconds. The operation effect of one time is executed. As shown in the table of FIG. 40D, in the second effect in which the timer display is performed for 40 seconds, the total value of the number of operations when the operation effect is selected is 2, that is, 2 in 40 seconds. The operation production of one time is executed. As shown in the table in FIG. 40(E), in the third effect in which the timer display is performed for 60 seconds, the total value of the number of operations when the operation effect is selected is 5, that is, 5 times in 60 seconds. The operation production of one time is executed.

  In this way, in the third effect in which the timer display is performed for 60 seconds, when the operation effect is selected, the operation effect is executed five times in 60 seconds, and the timer effect is displayed more than in the third effect. Two operation effects are executed in the second effect having a short period, and one operation effect is executed in the first effect having a shorter timer display period than the second effect. In this way, even in the timer effect executed during the same variable display, the data is set such that the ratio (frequency) of executing the operation effect is higher when the effect period is longer than when the effect period is short. Has been done. As a result, among the timer effects that are executed during the same variable display, even if it is an effect in which the timer display with a long effect period is executed, the execution frequency of the operation effect is set to be high, so that the player can achieve the effect. The ratio (frequency) of intervening in is increased, and it is possible to reduce the player from getting bored with the effect.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 40C to 40E, it is possible to select to execute the operation effect only when the timer display effect is provided, and when the timer display effect is performed, the timer effect is not performed. Since the frequency of operation performances is high, the execution ratio (frequency) of performances in which the player can intervene is high, and it is possible to further reduce the player's boredom in the performances in the long-term timer display. You can

  Next, an example of an effect pattern including operation effects in the first effect to the third effect will be described. FIG. 41 is a diagram showing, in a tabular form, an effect pattern selection table for selecting an effect pattern of the third effect. FIG. 41(A) shows the effect pattern selection table for the third effect used at the time of big hit, and FIG. 41(B) shows the effect pattern selection table for the third effect used at the time of losing. These data tables are stored in the ROM 90102 of the effect control microcomputer 90100.

  In each of the tables of FIGS. 41(A) and 41(B), a total of 90 random numbers SR4' (numerical value range of 0 to 89) for operation effect presence/absence selection are selected as one of the random numbers updated by the effect control microcomputer 90100. Are assigned to the first pattern, the second pattern, and the third pattern, respectively. For the SR4′, the number of values of the assigned random number SR4′ is shown for the sake of clarity.

  In the effect pattern selection table of the third specific effect at the time of big hit of FIG. 41(A), the value of SR4′ extracted at a predetermined timing has a relationship of “first pattern>second pattern>third pattern”. Data is set to. In the effect pattern selection table of the third specific effect at the time of big hit of FIG. 41(B), depending on the value of SR4′ extracted at a predetermined timing, the relationship of “1st pattern<2nd pattern<3rd pattern” is established. Data is set to.

  A plurality of types of colors of blue, green, and red in each operation effect shown in FIG. 41 are colors that suggest the degree of expectation for a big hit in the size relation of “blue<green<red”.

  The first pattern is a chance that the operation effect pattern is a first operation effect in which a chance is displayed according to the operation after the button operation promotion effect is executed, and a green character is displayed in response to the operation after the button operation promotion effect is displayed. The second operation effect that is displayed, the third operation effect that is SP-displayed in green characters according to the post-operation after the stick operation promotion display, and the red character that is displayed after the button operation promotion display Is composed of a fourth operation effect in which the expected degree% of "80%" is displayed and a fifth operation effect in which intense heat is displayed according to the operation after the stick operation promotion display. In the first pattern, the final effect executed as the expectation suggesting effect after the operation effect pattern is an effect in which the jackpot display result is derived and displayed according to the jackpot post-operation which is the stick operation promotion display.

  The second pattern is a first operation effect in which the operation effect pattern is the same as the first pattern, and a second operation effect in which a chance is displayed in blue characters according to the operation after the button operation promotion display is performed. The same third operation effect, a fourth operation effect in which the expectation% of "70%" is displayed in green characters according to the operation after the button operation promotion display is performed, and the same fifth operation effect as the first pattern. It is composed of In the second pattern, the same final effect as the first pattern is given after the operation effect pattern.

  In the third pattern, the operation effect pattern is the same first operation effect as the first pattern, the same second operation effect as the second pattern, and the SP operation is displayed in blue characters in response to the operation after the stick operation promotion display. The third operation effect, the fourth operation effect in which the expectation% of "60%" is displayed in green characters according to the operation after the button operation promotion display, and the same fifth operation as the first pattern It is composed by the production. This is constituted by a fifth operation effect in which after the stick operation promotion display is performed, intense heat display is performed according to the operation. In the third pattern, the same final effect as the first pattern is given after the operation effect pattern.

  In the effect pattern selection table for the third off-specific time effect in FIG. 41(B), the same first to third patterns as those set in the effect pattern selection table for the third effect in the big hit in FIG. 41(A) are used. The 1st pattern to the 3rd pattern are set, and as described above, the data is set so that the selection ratios of these patterns are the selection ratios opposite to the selection ratios in the effect pattern selection table of the third big hit effect. There is.

  In the above-mentioned second pattern, an effect suggesting that the expectation of a big hit is higher than that in the above-mentioned third pattern is executed during the operation effect. In the above-mentioned first pattern, an effect suggesting that the expectation of a big hit is higher than that in the second pattern is executed during the operation effect. Therefore, in the effect pattern selection table of the third specific effect during the big hit in FIG. 41A, when the big hit display result is obtained, the selection ratio is set so that the effect pattern having a higher expectation of the big hit can be easily selected. The data is set to have a size relation of “pattern>second pattern>third pattern”. On the other hand, conversely, in the effect pattern selection table for the out-of-specificity third specific effect shown in FIG. 41B, when the out-of-range display result is obtained, the selection ratio is set so that the effect pattern with a lower expectation of the big hit can be easily selected. The data is set so as to have a size relationship of “first pattern<second pattern<third pattern”.

  Although illustration is omitted, in the first effect, for example, in the operation effect display area 9095, a character such as “this variation is expected” is displayed in blue in response to the post-operation after the button operation promotion display. After performing the operation presentation, the first variation pattern that displays the expectation degree on a blue background, and the letters such as "This variation is expected" are displayed in red according to the operation after the button operation promotion display A performance pattern selection table is used such that, after executing the operation performance that is performed, the second variation pattern that displays the expected degree suggestion display of a red background can be selected.

  In the first effect, when the jackpot display result is obtained, the effect pattern is selected at a selection ratio of “first pattern<second pattern”, and when the result is a deviant display result, “first pattern>second pattern” is selected. An effect pattern selection table for the first effect is provided for each variation display result so that effect patterns are selected at a selection ratio. In the effect pattern selection table, similarly to the effect pattern selection table for the third specific effect, the value of SR3′ is assigned to each effect pattern.

  Although illustration is omitted, in the second effect, for example, in the operation effect display area 9095, an operation effect in which a character such as “Reach?” is displayed in blue in response to the operation after the button operation promotion display is performed. After executing, the stick operation promotion display is performed, and then a blue effect image is displayed around the effect design after executing an operation effect in which characters such as “SP may be?” are displayed in blue in response to the operation. After the first effect pattern and the operation effect in which a character such as "reach reach?" is displayed in red according to the operation after the button operation promotion display is performed, and after the stick operation promotion display is performed After performing an operation effect in which characters such as "SP may be?" are displayed in red according to the operation, a second effect pattern in which a red effect image is displayed around the effect pattern can be selected. A production pattern selection table is used.

  In the second effect, when the jackpot display result is obtained, the effect pattern is selected at a selection ratio of “first pattern<second pattern”, and when the result is a deviant display result, “first pattern>second pattern” is selected. An effect pattern selection table for the second effect is provided for each variation display result so that effect patterns are selected at a selection ratio. In the effect pattern selection table, similarly to the effect pattern selection table for the third specific effect, the value of SR3′ is assigned to each effect pattern.

  Next, a process for setting various effects including timer effects as shown in FIGS. 38 and 39 will be described. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the effect setting process (S90616). In FIG. 42, of the various settings included in the effect setting process in the effect symbol variation start process, the process relating to the setting of the timer effect is shown. In the effect setting process, the effect control CPU 90101 determines various effects executed by the timer effect by performing the following process.

  First, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern of the variation display executed this time is the variation pattern of the fourth super reach which is the specific super reach, based on the variation pattern command received at the time of this variation (S90901). The received variation pattern command is stored in the command storage area provided in the storage area of the RAM 90103. The effect control CPU 90101 refers to the storage area of the RAM 90103, and determines the fourth super-reach variation pattern depending on whether or not the fourth super-reach variation pattern command is stored in the area indicating the variation display to be executed this time. Or not. If it is not the variation pattern of the fourth super reach, the processing moves to S90912. If it is the variation pattern of the fourth super reach, the value of SR2 is extracted and one of the values shown in FIGS. The timer effect selection table is selected, and using the selected table, it is determined from the extracted value of SR2′ which of the timer display effect and the timer display non-effect is to be executed for the current variable display. (S90902). Whether or not the display result of the variable display this time is a big hit is determined by whether or not the display result of the variable display executed this time is a big hit by the display result command or the like received when executing the current variable display. .

  Next, based on the determination result of S90902, it is determined whether or not the timer display effect is selected and determined (S90903). When the timer display effect is not selected and determined in S90903 (the timer display non-effect is selected and determined), for example, in the first to third effects as illustrated in FIGS. 38(B2) and (C2), the timer is used. Data is set to execute the effect of not displaying, and the process proceeds to S90912. On the other hand, when the timer display effect is selected and determined in S90903, the value of SR3′ is extracted and the respective operation effect selection tables of the first effect to the third effect of FIGS. 40(C) to (E) are selected. Then, using the selected table, whether or not to execute the operation effect (presence/absence) is selectively determined from the extracted value of SR3′ for each of the first to third effects in the variable display this time (S90904).

  Next, based on the determination result of S90904, it is determined whether the first effect is selected and determined to have the operation effect (S90905). If the operation effect is not selected and determined in step S90905, the process advances to step S90907. On the other hand, when it is selected and determined in S90905 that the operation effect is present, the value of SR4′ is extracted, and one of the above-described ones is selected depending on whether or not the display result of the variable display this time is a big hit (is it a miss). The effect pattern selection table for one effect is selected, and using the selected table, the effect pattern for the first effect of the variable display this time is selected and determined from the extracted value of SR4′ (S90906), and the process proceeds to S90907.

  In S90907, it is determined based on the determination result of S90904 whether or not the second effect has been selected and determined to have the operation effect (S90907). If the operation effect is not selected and determined in S90907, the process proceeds to S90909. On the other hand, when it is selected and determined in S90907 that the operation effect is present, the value of SR4′ is extracted, and one of the above-mentioned ones is selected depending on whether or not the display result of the variable display this time is a big hit (is it out? The effect pattern selection table for the second effect is selected, and using the selected table, the effect pattern for the second effect of the variable display this time is selected and determined from the extracted value of SR4′ (S90908), and the process proceeds to S90909.

  In S90909, based on the determination result of S90904, it is determined whether or not the third effect is selected and determined to have the operation effect (S90909). If the operation effect is not selected and determined in step S90909, the process advances to step S90911. On the other hand, when it is selected and determined to have the operation effect in S90909, the value of SR4′ is extracted, and depending on whether or not the display result of the variable display this time is a big hit (whether it is off), FIG. An effect pattern selection table for any of the third effects of (B) is selected, and using the selected table, the effect pattern of the third effect of the present variable display is selected and determined from the extracted SR4′ value (S90910). ), and proceeds to S90911.

  In S90911, in the variable display this time, the timer display is performed in each of the first to third effects, and the operation effect is executed with the effect pattern selected as described above according to the presence or absence of the operation effect selected as described above. Data for executing possible effects is set (S90911), and the process proceeds to S90912.

  In S90912, regarding the effect of the variable display this time, other effect contents other than the above-described first effect, second effect, and third effect are determined. Then, the process ends.

  In the effect setting process, when the timer effect including the operation effect as shown in FIGS. 38 and 39 is executed, at the start of the variable display, the presence/absence of the timer display effect, the presence/absence of the operation effect, and the number of times the operation effect is executed. , And various items such as the effect pattern of the operation effect are determined in advance, and the effect is executed according to the determination during the variable display thereafter, so the control processing load of the effect control microcomputer 90100 during the variable display is reduced. can do.

  Next, a process of executing various effects including the timer effect as shown in FIG. 38 and FIG. 39 during the variable display of effect symbols will be described. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the timer effect process executed when the timer effect is performed in the effect symbol changing process (S90802).

  In FIG. 43, among various settings included in the effect setting process in the effect symbol variation start process, the process relating to the setting of the timer effect is shown. In the effect setting process, the effect control CPU 90101 determines various effects executed by the timer effect by performing the following process.

  First, it is determined whether or not the present time is the start time of execution of any timer effect that can be executed in the first effect to the third effect (S90920). In S90920, the time schedule of the performance progression that is predetermined in the variation pattern of the fourth super reach in which the variable display is being executed and the time value of the variable display timer that measures the time from the start of the variable display are confirmed. Based on this, it is determined whether or not the current time is the start of execution of the timer effect. Such a determination is possible because a time schedule for the timing of production progress is predetermined for each variation pattern, and production control for advancing the production is executed based on the time value of the variation display timer. Is.

  When it is the time to start execution of the timer effect in S90920, the effect control microcomputer 90100 starts measuring the time of the effect timer used for timer display (S90921), and starts the timer display corresponding to the measured value (S90922). The process ends. On the other hand, when it is not the time to start the execution of the timer effect in S90920, the period of the effect (for example, the first effect, the second effect, the third effect) in which the operation effect is currently set is set based on the time value of the variable display timer. It is determined whether or not it is in progress (S90923).

  When it is in the effect period in which the operation effect is set in S90923, it is determined based on the time value of the variable display timer whether or not any of the operation effect periods in the effect period is in effect (S90924). ). When it is during the operation effect period in S90924, it is determined whether or not the operation promotion display (the button operation promotion display, the stick operation promotion display described above) during the operation effect is being performed (S90925). If the operation promotion display is being performed in step S90925, the process advances to step S90927. On the other hand, when the operation promotion display is not being performed in S90925, the operation promotion display set according to the mode of the operation effect period being executed is started (S90926), and the process proceeds to S90927. As a result, in each operation effect, the operation prompting display as shown in FIGS. 39(A), (C), (E), (G), and (I) is executed.

  In S90927, it is confirmed whether or not a predetermined operation effect corresponding to the operation promotion effect is detected (S90927). If the corresponding predetermined operation effect is not detected in S90927, the process ends. On the other hand, when the corresponding predetermined operation effect is detected in S90927, the operation promotion display being executed is ended (S90928), and the first effect period and the second effect period are set based on the setting information in S90911. , And an operation corresponding effect corresponding to the type of operation effect period such as the third effect period is started (S90929), and the process ends.

  When the specific effect period of the specific effect existence setting is not in S90923, and when neither of the operation effect periods is in S90924, at the end of timing of the effect timer (25 seconds have elapsed in the first effect). , 40 seconds have elapsed in the second effect, and 60 seconds have elapsed in the third effect) (S90930). If it is not time for the effect timer to finish measuring time in S90930, it is determined whether or not the operation promotion effect or the operation corresponding effect is currently being performed (S90931). If the operation promotion effect or the operation corresponding effect is not being performed in S90931, the process ends. On the other hand, when the operation promotion effect or the operation corresponding effect is being performed in S90931, since the effect period has ended, the operation promotion effect or the operation corresponding effect process being executed is ended (S90932), and the process ends.

  When the time counting of the effect timer is finished in S90930, the timer display is finished and the expectation suggestion display is started after the timer display is finished. Therefore, the expectation suggestion display set in S90911 is set. The execution of is started (S90933). Then, the timer display being executed is ended (S90934), and the process is ended. As a result, the expectation suggestion display as shown in FIG. 39(K) is executed, and the timer display area 9094 and the operation effect display area 9095 as shown in FIG. 39(K) are deleted.

[Example of operation effect that suggests which of a plurality of types of predetermined effects will be executed]
Next, as an operation effect that is a motion corresponding effect, an effect (an expectation degree% in FIGS. 38 and 39, etc.) that suggests an expectation that an advantageous state (a big hit game state, etc.) that is advantageous to the player is suggested, and a plurality of types. An example of executing at least one of the effects that suggests which of the predetermined effects is to be executed will be described.

  In the effect pattern shown in FIG. 41, for the operation effect, the effect suggesting which of the plurality of types of predetermined effects is to be executed is not executed. However, regarding the operation effect, for example, there are a plurality of types of special reach effects (SP effects, etc.), and when the effect develops from the normal reach effect state to the special reach effect, an effect that suggests the development destination of the effect is performed. For example, an effect that suggests which of a plurality of types of predetermined effects is to be executed may be executed. When such an operation effect is executed, at least one of the operation effect and an operation effect that suggests a degree of expectation of a big hit, such as an operation effect that displays the degree of expectation% in FIGS. 42 and 43, are executed. You may perform the production control. By doing so, the variety of operation effects can be enriched, and the boredom of the player can be further reduced.

  Next, a first area effect and a second area effect as area effects executed in another embodiment, and special effects and timer effects executed in the first area effect will be described.

[Second example of timer effect]
[1 area production]
The first area effect is all the effects executed in the first area 9091 (see FIG. 44) located at the lower left of the effect display device 909 when the variable display based on the pending storage information is executed. While the first area effect is being executed, an effect of displaying a timer and then executing a timer effect after executing a special effect described below, or a so-called gasse effect in which nothing is displayed after executing the special effect ("Gasse" is " (Including the meaning of "false") is performed. The first area effect is not limited to the first area 9091, and may be executed in any display area of the effect display device 909.

[Special production]
As for the special effect, the timer effect is executed after the special effect is executed by executing the “visual concealment display” in which the timer frame 9097 indicating the execution of the timer effect is displayed in the first area 9091 or not displayed. It is an effect that displays a suggestion that indicates that. After the special effect is executed for a predetermined time, the timer effect or the gasse effect without timer effect is executed from the special effect. It should be noted that the special effect is not limited to the above-described effects, and may be any effect that suggests execution of the timer effect, and may be an effect that fuels whether or not a semitransparent timer frame is materialized.

[Timer production]
The timer effect is a timer effect by updating the period display that shows the effect period such as the waiting time until the specific effect is executed after the special effect is executed when the variable display based on the pending storage information is executed by updating the period display. It is an effect that executes one of the effects of a plurality of types when the display is in the predetermined mode. In the timer display, the count value that is counted down is updated from the initial value of the count value set at a predetermined timing, and finally the value of the timer display becomes 0 (a value indicating 0 second). Such a timer display displayed during the timer effect is displayed in the first area 91 for a predetermined period during the variable display.

[Second area effect]
When the variable display based on the pending storage information is executed, the second area effect is a plurality of types of predetermined display that suggests the display result of the variable display and the effect executed during the change after the specific effect described below is executed. The effect of displaying one of the predetermined displays is executed. The second area effect is not limited to the second area 9092, and may be executed in any display area of the effect display device 909.

  The specific effect is an effect that suggests that one of the plurality of types of predetermined displays is displayed. After the specific effect is executed for a predetermined time, for example, one predetermined display of a plurality of kinds of predetermined displays that suggest the effect state or the game state such as "?", "NEXT", and "READY GO" is displayed. As a specific effect, for example, a virtual rotating reel with all predetermined displays is rotated for a predetermined time at a speed at which it is not possible to visually recognize which predetermined display is displayed, and then gradually rotated. After the speed is reduced to make the predetermined display visible, an effect of stopping at one predetermined display is executed. It should be noted that the specific effect is not limited to the above-described effect, and may be an effect that suggests that one predetermined display among a plurality of types of predetermined displays is displayed. In addition, the predetermined display includes a timer effect suggestion display indicating a timer effect and a plurality of types of specific displays other than the timer effect suggestion display. The specific display will be described later (see FIG. 42).

  FIG. 44 is a diagram for explaining area effects including the first area effect and the second area effect. FIG. 44(a) is a diagram showing a display example of the effect display device 909 at the start of variation when the area effect is not executed. 44B to 44D are diagrams showing display examples of the effect display device 909 during the first area effect. 44E and 44F are diagrams showing display examples of the effect display device 909 during execution of the second area effect. In FIG. 44, the state where the left, middle, and right effect symbols are being variably displayed is indicated by three downward arrows.

  As shown in FIG. 44A, in the display area of the effect display device 909, a display area of a first area 9091 capable of executing the first area effect is provided on the lower left side, and a second area effect is provided on the lower right side. An executable second area 9092 display area is provided. In the first area 9091, basically, the image regarding the area is not displayed, and the image regarding the area is displayed as necessary. In FIG. 44A, in the second area 9092, the image related to the area is constantly displayed.

  In FIG. 44(a), at the start of variation of the effect symbol corresponding to the special symbol, a state is shown in which neither the first area effect nor the second area effect is executed. Specifically, nothing is displayed in the first area 9091 indicated by the broken line in the figure. In the second area 9092, a frame portion that can identify the second area 9092 is displayed. Further, the area inside the frame portion is displayed in a display mode showing, for example, a shutter (not shown), and the shutter portion is normally closed. Then, the shutter portion opens when the second area effect is executed.

  The image of the timer effect displayed when the first area effect is executed in the first area 9091 is, as shown in FIG. 44D, a timer frame 9097 and a timer display that displays a timer numerical value in the timer frame 9097. And 9094. Each image of the timer frame 9097 and the timer numerical value is displayed in any one of a plurality of display colors such as white and red.

  When the first area effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 44B, in the first area 9091, the timer frame 9097 of the color selected from the plurality of display colors is reciprocated in the direction of the arrow in the symbol. By displaying the image to be displayed, a special effect is displayed in which the “visible/hidden display” is repeated in which the image is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 909 and is not displayed.

  After the execution of the special effect, the galleries effect as shown in FIG. 44C or the timer effect as shown in FIG. 44D is executed. As shown in FIG. 44( c ), the gasse effect is an effect in which the timer effect is not executed, and nothing is displayed in the first area 9091 by deleting the timer frame 9097 that has been displayed and hidden. It becomes a state. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 44( d ), when the timer effect is executed, the timer frame 9097 that has been visible and hidden is displayed in any one of a plurality of display colors in the first area 9091. It Then, in the timer frame 9097, the timer display 9094 appears and is displayed in any one of a plurality of types of display colors, and, for example, a timing period such as "10:00" indicating 10 seconds is displayed as a timer numerical value. .. In the timer effect, after such a time counting period is shown on the timer display 9094, countdown time counting on the timer display 9094 is started.

  In the timer effect, when the countdown of the timer display 9094 progresses and the timer value of the timer display 9094 becomes “00:00” indicating 0 seconds, the effect control that starts the super reach effect specified by the change pattern command at the start of the change Is executed.

  As described above, when the first area effect is executed, the timer effect 9094 is displayed in the first area 9091, and after the timer effect is executed, the predetermined effect such as the super reach effect can be executed. Thus, when the special effect in which the timer frame 9097 is displayed in the hidden state is executed in the first area effect, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the timer effect is executed.

  Further, after the special effect of FIG. 44(b) is executed, the timer effect may be executed as shown in FIG. 44(d) or may not be executed as shown in FIG. 44(c). It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the timer effect will be executed before the timer effect is executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the process before the timer effect is executed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 44B, in the first area 9091, the timer effect is displayed by displaying the timer frame 9097 so that the timer display 9094 is executed. It is possible to pay attention to whether or not it is executed, and it is possible to further enhance the interest of the game in the process before the timer effect is executed.

  When the second area effect is executed in the second area 9092, as shown in FIG. 44(d), in the specific effect, within the frame portion of the second area 9092, "?", "NEXT", and , "READY GO" and the like, a plurality of types of predetermined displays that suggest a production state or a game state are sequentially displayed as indicated by arrows in the figure. Then, after a specific period has elapsed from the start of the specific effect, one of a plurality of types of predetermined displays is stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. In the figure, an example is shown in which the predetermined display of "heat" is stopped and displayed.

  In the second area effect, when any kind of predetermined display is stopped and displayed in the second area 9092, the effect corresponding to the stop displayed predetermined display is then executed. For example, when a predetermined display "READY GO" is designated and displayed, a predetermined timer effect is executed. Further, when the predetermined display "NEXT" is designated and displayed, the above-mentioned pseudo-relation effect is executed.

  In this way, after the second area effect is executed, various effects corresponding to the predetermined display stopped and displayed in the second area 9092 can be executed. Thereby, when the second specific effect is executed, the player's attention can be drawn to the display of the second area 9092, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In addition, in other 1st Embodiment, although it was described that the special effect is an effect of performing "visible/hidden display", the effect is not limited to this and may be an effect that suggests execution of a timer effect. For example, it may be an effect of displaying a semitransparent timer frame or an effect of displaying a virtual rotating reel with a plurality of types of timer values and rotating the rotating reel. Further, although the specific effect is an effect of rotating a virtual rotating reel, the effect is not limited to this, and may be an effect that suggests that one predetermined display of a plurality of kinds of predetermined displays is displayed. For example, a virtual shutter may be displayed in the second area 9092 and the shutter may be opened or closed, or a predetermined display may be displayed semitransparently in the second area 9092.

  The effect control relating to the second example of the timer effect described above is executed by the effect control microcomputer 90100.

[Other Second Embodiment]
In the other second embodiment, a modified example of the timer effect executed in each of the first area 9091 and the second area 9092 will be described with respect to the second example of the timer effect shown in the other first embodiment. Here, as a timer effect according to another second embodiment, an effect executed in the first area 9091 is shown as a representative example, but a timer effect according to another second embodiment can be similarly executed in the second area 92. Is.

  The timer effect executed in the other second embodiment is a period display that shows an effect period such as a waiting time until a specific effect is executed in a timer display format when the variable display based on the pending storage information is executed. Is an effect that executes one of a plurality of kinds of effects when the timer display is in a predetermined mode by updating. In the timer display, the count value that is counted down is updated from the initial value of the count value set at a predetermined timing, and finally the value of the timer display becomes 0 (a value indicating 0 second). Such a timer display displayed during the timer effect is displayed on the effect display device 909 for a predetermined period during the variable display.

  Further, during execution of the timer effect, after the timer display is counted down in the period from the start of the period display by the timer display until the period display becomes 0 which is the predetermined mode, the timer display is counted as the stop mode. The value displayed on the timer may be set to 0 after stopping for a second and passing through the stop mode. In this way, the effect of stopping the countdown of the timer display for several seconds is referred to as a freeze effect. In addition, as the freeze effect, the countdown of the timer display does not completely stop for several seconds, and may be such that the countdown does not proceed for a predetermined period or longer. For example, if the freeze effect occurs in the timer display of "15:47" during the countdown, the specified number is specified as "15:46" → "15:47" → "15:46". By switching back and forth between the numbers and, the effect that the timer display does not advance the countdown for a predetermined period or longer may be provided. Also, the countdown progresses in the order of "15:47" → "15:46" → "15:45", but by making the countdown extremely slower than the actual time measurement, almost no time is advanced. It may be a production.

  FIG. 45 is a diagram for explaining the timer effect in the other second embodiment. 45A to 45E are diagrams showing display examples of the timer display 9094 in the first area 9091 when the freeze effect is executed during the timer effect. 45(f) to (i) are diagrams showing display examples of the timer display 9094 in the first area 9091 when the freeze effect is not executed during the timer effect. Here, in the timer effect, one of a plurality of types of time is determined as the number of seconds of the timer effect. In FIGS. 45(a) to (e), a time period of 30 seconds is selected as the period for executing the timer effect. Further, in FIGS. 45(f) to 45(i), a time of 20 seconds is selected as the period for executing the timer effect. Note that the timer effect of the other second embodiment may be executed in the second area 9092, or may be executed in any area in the effect display device 909.

  As shown in FIG. 45(a), when the timer effect is started, for example, the timer display 9094 displays a time period of "20:00" indicating 20 seconds in the first area 9091. The period displayed on the timer display 9094 is displayed up to 2 digits (one hundredths of a digit) or less of the second, and the value is counted down as time passes. FIG. 45B is a diagram showing a timer display 9094 that is displayed when 10 seconds have elapsed after counting down from 20 seconds. As shown in FIG. 49B, every 10 seconds, when "10:00" indicating 10 seconds is displayed, a LOCK display 9095 is displayed above the timer display 9094. The LOCK display 9095 is an action effect in which the display image acts on the timer display 9094, and the display image indicated by the character LOCK is added to the timer display 9094. A freeze effect is executed by adding the LOCK display 9095 to the timer display 9094. By thus adding the LOCK display 9095 to the timer display 9094, the player can easily recognize that the freeze effect is being executed.

  FIG. 45C is a diagram showing a display mode of the timer display 9094 when 10 seconds have elapsed from the state of FIG. 45B. As shown in FIGS. 45(b) and 45(c), when the freeze effect is executed, the display of the timer display 9094 is stopped for 10 seconds while the display of “10:00” remains, and the LOCK display is performed. 9095 is added. After the lapse of the freeze period of 10 seconds, the timer display 9094 is again counted down as shown in FIG. 45(d). After that, as shown in FIG. 45(e), the timer display 9094 is counted down and displayed as “00:00” indicating 0 seconds which is a predetermined mode. Then, based on the fact that the timer display has reached 0 second, one of a plurality of types of effects is executed.

  Here, an example of an effect executed when the timer display 9094 becomes 0 seconds will be shown. The effect to be executed when the timer display 9094 is 0 seconds, for example, the effect that the temporary stop symbol of the pseudo-relation is temporarily stopped (for example, the symbol described as "NEXT" is temporarily stopped), the reach symbol Production that indicates that the player has stopped and has reached (e.g., an accessory works at the timing of the reach symbol stop), production that shows the jackpot expectation of the fluctuation during the reach production (for example, jackpot expectation during reach). It changes to a high background). The effect executed when the timer display 9094 reaches 0 second is not limited to the effect shown here, and may be any effect.

  Next, a case where the freeze effect is not executed will be described with reference to FIGS. When a time of 20 seconds is selected as the period for executing the timer effect, as shown in FIG. 45(f), when the timer effect is started, for example, "20:00" indicating 20 seconds as the timer display 9094. Is displayed in the first area 91. FIG. 45(g) is a diagram showing a timer display 9094 that is displayed when 10 seconds have elapsed after counting down from 20 seconds. As shown in FIG. 45(g), “10:00” indicating 10 seconds is displayed every 10 seconds. Since the freeze effect is not executed, the LOCK display 9095 is not displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 45(h), when 1 second has elapsed from FIG. 45(g), the timer display is displayed as “09:00” indicating 9 seconds, as shown in FIG. 45(h). .. After that, as shown in FIG. 45(i), the timer display 9094 is counted down and displayed as “00:00” indicating 0 seconds which is a predetermined mode. Then, based on the fact that the timer display has reached 0 second, one of a plurality of types of effects is executed. Here, in FIGS. 45(a) to 45(i), the timer display 9094 having two digits or less of seconds is actually counted down, but is not disclosed in detail in the drawings. Alternatively, the second digit below the second may not be displayed, and only the number of seconds such as "10", "9"... "0" may be counted down.

  In this way, the timer display 9094 displayed in the timer effect is a pattern that passes through the freeze effect during the period from the start of display until the countdown reaches "00:00" indicating 0 seconds which is the predetermined mode. And a pattern that does not go through the freeze effect. Therefore, it is possible for the player to pay attention to the display mode of the timer display 9094 during the period from the start of the countdown by the timer display 9094 to 0 seconds.

  Further, in the pattern in which the freeze effect is executed in the timer effect, as shown in FIGS. 45(b) to (d), after the freeze effect is executed for 10 seconds, the timer display 9094 is updated again. By doing so, the player can be made to pay attention to the display mode of the timer display 9094 during the period until the timer display 9094 becomes 0 second.

  Further, although the timer selection time for determining the timer seconds (the time from the start of the timer display to 0 seconds) which is the number of seconds in which the timer effect is executed, the freeze effect is different as shown in FIG. 45. There is a case where the display mode at the start of the timer display 9094 is the same (when both are “20:00”) in the case where is not executed and the case where the freeze effect is executed. In this way, it is possible to execute an unexpected effect without asking whether to go through the freeze effect at the start of the timer display 9094.

[Other Third Embodiment]
In the other third embodiment, a modified example of the timer effect executed in each of the first area 9091 and the second area 9092 will be described with respect to the second example of the timer effect shown in the other first embodiment. Here, as the timer effect according to the other third embodiment, the effect executed in the first area 9091 is shown as a representative example, but the timer effect according to the other third embodiment can be similarly executed in the second area 9092. Is.

  In the timer effect executed in the third embodiment, the special pattern timer effect is set in addition to the normal pattern timer effect. The normal pattern timer effect is a pattern in which the display value of the timer display is only counted down as time elapses during the period from the start of the timer display until the timer display becomes 0 seconds. On the other hand, in the special pattern timer effect, when the timer display 9094 is counted down to 0 seconds, the effect using the operation means such as the stick controller 90122 is executed. The player's operation on the stick controller 90122 is detected by the tilt direction sensor unit 90123. Specifically, when the timer display 9094 counts down to 0 seconds and the player performs an operation of pulling the stick controller 90122, the number of seconds on the timer display 9094 which has been 0 seconds increases and counts down again. Is performed. Such a special pattern may be executed a plurality of times, and when 0 second is finally reached, a predetermined effect is executed.

  FIG. 46 is a diagram for explaining the timer effect in the other third embodiment. FIG. 46A of FIG. 46 is a diagram showing a timing chart in the case of a two-time pattern with a timer selection time of 20 seconds as a special pattern of the timer effect. The two-time pattern refers to an effect pattern in which the effect using the operation means is executed twice while the timer effect is being executed. 46(b) to (i) are diagrams showing display examples of the timer display 9094 in the pattern of FIG. 46(a). First, the timer effect of the special pattern will be described with reference to FIGS. Note that the special pattern is not limited to the double pattern, and may be a single pattern or a pattern of three or more times.

  As shown in FIG. 46(a), in the two-time pattern of the timer selection time of 20 seconds executed as the timer effect, "04:00" is first displayed on the timer display 9094 (FIG. 46(b)). From this state, the countdown of the timer display 9094 is executed for 4 seconds. When the timer display 9094 reaches the value indicated by "00:00" (FIG. 46(c)), the operation effect of operating the operation means such as the stick controller 90122 is executed. In the stick controller 90122, the period during which the operation is valid (hereinafter, also referred to as the operation valid period) is set to 2 seconds. When the player performs the operation of pulling the stick controller 90122 during the operation valid period of 2 seconds, “+04:00” is displayed on the screen of the effect display device 909 (FIG. 46(d. )). The display of "+04:00" is displayed on the screen of the effect display device 909 for the remaining operation effective period and a period obtained by adding 1 second (the minimum period of the timer display) to the time, and "00" as the timer display 9094. The number of seconds increases from "00:0", and the value of "04:00" is displayed in the first area 9091 (FIG. 46(e)).

  When the operation of pulling the stick controller 90122 is not executed during the operation valid period of 2 seconds, “+04:00” is automatically displayed on the screen of the effect display device 909 at the end of the operation valid period. It is displayed (FIG. 46(d)). The display of "+04:00" is displayed on the screen of the effect display device 909 for 1 second after the end of the operation valid period, and the number of seconds is increased from "00:00" as the timer display 9094. The value “04:00” is displayed in the first area 9091 (FIG. 46(e)).

  Here, regardless of whether the stick controller 90122 is operated or not, the display of “+04:00” is displayed on the screen of the effect display device 909 for at least 1 second (FIG. 46(d. )). Further, as the timer display 9094, the number of seconds increases from "00:00", and the value of "04:00" is displayed in the first area 9091 (FIG. 46(e)). At this time, the player can recognize that the number of seconds on the timer display 9094 has increased. The total period of the operation valid period (2 seconds of operation in FIG. 46A) and the timer display period of the effect display device 909 showing the increased number of seconds of the timer display 9094 (1 second of timer display in FIG. 46A) is 3 in total. It is set to seconds.

  After that, the timer display 9094 starts counting down from 4 seconds indicated by "04:00", and when the timer display 9094 reaches the value indicated by "00:00" (Fig. 46(f)), The effect of pulling the stick controller 90122 is executed during the operation valid period. When the player performs an operation of pulling the stick controller 90122 within 2 seconds, “+06:00” is displayed on the screen of the effect display device 909 (FIG. 46(g)). The display of "+06:00" is displayed on the screen of the effect display device 909 for the remaining operation valid period and a period obtained by adding 1 second to the remaining valid period, and the number of seconds from "00:00" is displayed as the timer display 9094. The value increases and the value of “06:00” is displayed in the first area 9091 (FIG. 46(h)).

  When the operation of pulling the stick controller 90122 is not executed during the operation valid period of 2 seconds, “+06:00” is automatically displayed on the screen of the effect display device 909 at the end of the operation valid period. It is displayed (FIG. 46(g)). The display of "+06:00" is displayed on the screen of the effect display device 909 for one second after the end of the operation valid period, and the number of seconds is increased from "00:00" as the timer display 9094. The value "06:00" is displayed in the first area 9091 (FIG. 46(h)).

  When the timer display 9094 starts counting down from 6 seconds and the timer display 9094 reaches the value indicated by "00:00" (FIG. 46(i)), a predetermined effect is executed. The effect executed when the timer display 9094 is 0 second may be any effect.

  Thus, in the special pattern, when the timer effect is started and the timer display 9094 reaches the value indicated by 0 seconds, the number of seconds on the timer display 9094 increases and the effect of performing the countdown again is performed. This allows the player to pay attention to the effect when the value of the timer display 9094 becomes 0 second. Further, with such a special pattern timer effect, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the display mode in the period from when the countdown of the timer display 9094 is started until the value of the timer display 9094 finally becomes 0 second. it can.

[Other Fourth Embodiment]
In the other fourth embodiment, a modified example of the timer effect executed in each of the first area 9091 and the second area 9092 will be described with respect to the second example of the timer effect shown in the other first embodiment. Here, as a timer effect according to the other fourth embodiment, an example in which the timer effect is applied to each of the first area 9091 and the second area 9092, a single area called a third area 9096 shown in FIG. 47 is used. A description will be given using this as a typical example.

  The timer effect in the other fourth embodiment is executed during the reach. Here, as shown in FIG. 28, the variation pattern of reach includes a variation pattern of normal reach and a variation pattern of super reach. When the variation pattern command designating super reach is transmitted from the game control microcomputer 90560, the effect control CPU 90101 executes the effect of the specified super reach based on the transmitted command. In the first to fourth super reach of FIG. 28, for each variation pattern, any one of a plurality of types of special reach (hereinafter, also simply referred to as SP reach) is executed.

  In the SP reach, any one of the effect symbols in the variable display is the reach. After that, after reaching a predetermined time after reaching the reach state (after the normal reach or after the reach effect different from the normal reach), the SP reach is developed. The SP reach executed in the super reach is a reach with a high expectation that a big hit display result is obtained, as compared with the normal reach that does not develop to SP reach and does not give a flashy effect after the reach. During SP reach, for example, an effect such as a battle effect is executed on the liquid crystal screen. The battle effect is an effect in which a teammate character and an enemy character fight each other, and when the teammate character wins, a big hit display result is displayed, and when the teammate character is defeated, a display result is displayed.

  Further, in the other fourth embodiment, a case will be described in which the timer effect is started in the third area 9096 which is the lower central area of the display screen of the effect display device 909. For example, during SP reach, a flashy effect using the entire screen is executed. In such a case, the timer display 9094 displayed in the third area 9096 does not interfere with such an effect, so that the timer does not overlap the display screen of the effect display device 909 (for example, the lower left position of the effect display device 909). The display 9094 is moved. In the other fourth embodiment, the timer effect and the SP reach are simultaneously executed. The effect when the timer effect and the SP reach are executed will be described with reference to FIG. 47.

  FIG. 47 is a diagram for explaining the timer effect in the other fourth embodiment. When the timer effect is executed, the patterns shown in FIGS. 47A and 47B and the patterns shown in FIGS. 47A and 47C are executed. As shown in FIG. 47( a ), when the reach is applied with the symbol “4” on the effect display device 9, the timer image is displayed in the third area 9096 at the lower center of the screen. On the timer image, a timer display 9094 displaying "20:00" is displayed. The timer display 9094 counts down with the passage of time.

  The patterns shown in FIGS. 47(a) and 47(b) show the case where the normal reach is developed to the weak SP reach. The weak SP reach is an SP reach that is less likely to be a big hit display result than a strong SP reach described later. The degree of expectation of the jackpot display result is indicated by the number of black stars shown in FIG. 47(b). The weak SP reach to be executed this time has an expectation of 2 out of 5, so the expectation is not so high. During the weak SP reach, the effect design is displayed in the upper right area of the effect display device 909 as a command design in a downsized (reduced) mode. Further, the timer image moves from the lower center position on the screen to the lower left end position (the position corresponding to the first region 9091) when the weak SP reach is started.

  When the SP reach is executed, the frame portion 9096a of the timer image may change. However, as shown in FIG. 47(b), in the weak SP reach, the frame portion 9096a is displayed in the same manner as in FIG. 47(a) before the development to SP reach. Further, the timer display 9094 is counted down and is indicated by "15:00". During SP reach, a flashy effect using the entire display screen is executed as compared with the case of FIG. 47A before SP reach development. When a flashy effect such as the SP reach effect is executed, if the timer image is displayed in the third area 9096 at the lower center of the screen, the effect is hindered. Therefore, when the SP reach is executed during the period from the start of the timer display 9094 until the timer display 9094 becomes 0 second, the timer display 9094 corresponds to the position at the left end of the screen (corresponding to the first area 9091). Position). When the SP reach is not executed, the timer image does not change at the lower center position of the screen and the timer display 9094 is counted down.

  In this way, the position of the timer display 9094 is changed depending on whether or not the SP reach is executed in the period from the start of the display of the timer display 9094 until the timer display 9094 becomes 0 seconds. Therefore, it is possible to consider the situation of the production such as whether or not the production such as SP reach is executed, and the interest of the game is improved.

  Further, FIG. 47(c) shows a case where the reach state of FIG. 47(a) is expanded to the strong SP reach. The strong SP reach is more likely to be a big hit display result than the weak SP reach. As shown in FIG. 47(c), the strong SP reach executed this time has an expected degree of 4 out of 5 levels, and thus is an effect having a high expected degree of a big hit. During the strong SP reach, the effect design is displayed in the upper right area of the effect display device 909 as a command design in a downsized (reduced) mode. Further, the timer image moves from the third region 9096 at the lower center of the screen to the position at the lower left end (the position corresponding to the first region 9091) on the screen when the strong SP reach is started.

  Further, when the strong SP reach is executed, the mode of the frame portion 9096b of the timer image changes. For example, as shown in FIG. 47(c), the color of the frame portion 9096b changes from white to red (the shaded portion in FIG. 47(c)). Further, the timer display 9094 is counted down and is indicated by "15:00". In the strong SP reach, as in the case of the weak SP reach, in the period from when the timer display 9094 is started until the timer display 9094 becomes 0 seconds, when the SP reach is executed, the timer display 9094 is displayed at the left end of the screen. It is moved to the position (the position corresponding to the first area 9091).

  In this way, the position of the timer display 9094 is changed depending on whether or not the SP reach is executed in the period from the start of the display of the timer display 9094 until the timer display 9094 becomes 0 seconds. Therefore, it is possible to consider the situation of the production such as whether or not the production such as SP reach is executed, and the interest of the game is improved.

  Moreover, SP reach is a reach with a higher jackpot expectation than a normal reach that ends without developing SP reach. Therefore, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game by considering that such a reach with a high expectation of a big hit is executed. Further, as shown in FIG. 47, in a normal state (a state in which the reach is only applied) before the SP reach is developed, the timer display 9094 is displayed in the third area 9096 at the lower center of the effect display device 909, During the execution of SP reach, the timer display 9094 is displayed at the lower left end position of the effect display device 909 (the position corresponding to the first area 9091). Therefore, by preventing the timer display 9094 from interfering with the effect during SP reach, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 47, when the weak SP reach is being executed, the frame portion 9096a of the timer image remains white, and when the strong SP reach is being executed, the frame portion 9096b of the timer image is red. Change and display. In this way, by setting the display form of the frame of the timer display 9094 according to the SP reach to be executed, the degree of expectation for the big hit is shown, and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

  When the timer effect of the other fourth embodiment is being executed, the second area effect as shown in the first embodiment is executed at the position corresponding to the second area 9092. Good.

Next, main effects obtained by the above-described embodiment will be described.
(1) As shown in FIGS. 40(C) to (E), even in the timer effect executed during the same variable display, the operation effect is performed in a longer effect period than in a shorter effect period. The data is set so that the percentage of users doing it is high. As a result, among the timer effects executed during the same variable display, even if the timer display has a long effect period, the execution ratio of the operation effect is set to be high, so It is possible to reduce the possibility that the player gets bored with the production because the ratio of intervening in is increased.

  (2) As shown in FIG. 38(C1), in the third effect, a plurality of operation effects in which the player can intervene by the operation are executed in accordance with the progress of the timer effect, so the player's game It is possible to increase the motivation to participate in the game and improve the enjoyment of the game.

  (3) As shown in FIG. 38(C1), in the third effect, in the effect with the timer, in a period from the start of the third effect to the lapse of 60 seconds, a constant period T (10 seconds) is increased. Since the first to fifth operation effects may be executed a plurality of times, it is possible to reduce boredom of the player when a relatively long time is displayed on the timer display.

  (4) As described in [Example of operation effect that suggests which of a plurality of types of predetermined effects will be executed], as an operation effect that is a motion corresponding effect, an advantageous state advantageous to the player (big hit game state) At least one of an effect that suggests an expected degree (e.g., an expected degree% in FIGS. 38 and 39) and an effect that suggests which one of a plurality of types of predetermined effects will be executed. In the example, the variety of operation effects is enriched, and the boredom of the player can be further reduced.

  (5) As shown in FIG. 38(C1), in the third effect, different operation means such as an operation effect corresponding to a button operation and an operation effect corresponding to a stick operation are performed according to the timer time period. Since it is possible to execute the operation corresponding effect according to the operation, it is possible to further reduce the boredom of the player.

  (6) As shown in FIGS. 40(C) to 40(E), it is possible to select to perform the operation effect only when the timer display effect is provided, and when the timer display effect is performed, the operation is not performed when the timer display effect is not performed. Since the operation performance is executed at a high rate, the execution rate at which the player can intervene is increased, so that it is possible to further reduce the boredom of the player during the long-term timer display. ..

  (7) As shown in FIG. 44, after the special effect of FIG. 44(b) is executed, the timer effect is executed as shown in FIG. 44(d), and as shown in FIG. 44(c). Since it may not be executed, it becomes possible for the player to have a sense of expectation that the timer effect will be executed before executing the timer effect, and the process before the timer effect is executed The interest can be improved.

  (8) As shown in FIG. 44( b ), in the first area 9091, the special effect that indicates that the timer display 9094 is executed by displaying the timer frame 9097 in the hidden state is executed, thereby performing the timer effect. It is possible to focus on whether or not is executed, and it is possible to further improve the interest of the game in the process before the timer effect is executed.

  (9) As shown in FIG. 47, the special effect can be executed at a plurality of timings such as when the fluctuation starts or before the reach start. By being able to execute, it is possible to make the player pay attention to at which timing the area effect is executed, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

  (10) As shown in FIG. 46 and FIG. 47, the selection ratio of the execution timing of the first area effect is different between the off time and the big hit, and the timer effect selection in the first area effect is performed between the off time and the big hit. It is possible to further pay attention to which timing the special effect is executed due to a different ratio or the like.

  (11) As shown in FIG. 47, as the timer frame 9097 displayed and hidden during the special effect, a plurality of types of special effects including a special effect displaying a white timer frame 9097 and a special effect displaying a red timer frame 9097. By being able to execute any of the above, it is possible to focus on which type of special effect is executed.

  (12) As shown in FIG. 47, the white timer frame can be displayed and hidden before the red timer numerical value is displayed. Even if it is done, it is possible to prevent the player's expectation for the big hit game state from decreasing.

  (13) As shown in FIG. 45, the timer display 9094 displayed in the timer effect is counted down from the start of the display until it reaches “00:00” indicating 0 seconds which is the predetermined mode, A pattern that goes through the freeze effect and a pattern that does not go through the freeze effect are provided. Therefore, it is possible for the player to pay attention to the display mode of the timer display 9094 during the period from the start of the countdown by the timer display 9094 to 0 seconds.

  (14) As shown in FIG. 46, when the timer display 9094 reaches 0 second, a special pattern in which the time count value of the timer display 9094 increases can be executed, so that the value of the timer display 9094 becomes 0 second. It is possible to draw the player's attention to the effect produced when the game is played.

  (15) As shown in FIG. 47, it is possible to change the position of the third area 9096 depending on whether or not the SP reach is being executed, so that an effect such as whether or not an effect like the SP reach is being executed. The situation of can be taken into consideration and the interest of the game is improved.

Next, modifications and characteristic points of the embodiment described above will be listed below.
(1) In the first example of the timer effect, a predetermined display performs a predetermined operation to display a specific mode, and when the predetermined display becomes the specific mode, one of a plurality of types of specific effects is specified. The example of the effect control for executing the effect has been described. The "predetermined display" is not limited to the display in which the numerical value changes according to the passage of time as shown in FIG. 39, and does not directly indicate the passage of time with a numerical value like an hourglass, but the time is changed by the flow of sand. It may be one that indirectly shows the progress. Another example of indirectly indicating the passage of time may be, for example, a display in which the same operation is repeated such that the image showing the bomb repeatedly expands and contracts in a manner in which the image indicating a bomb is likely to explode. Also, the "predetermined display" repeatedly expands and contracts in a mode in which the bomb is likely to explode in the same size until a predetermined timing according to the passage of time, but after the predetermined timing, the bomb is gradually enlarged and displayed. It is also possible to perform various different operations.

  (2) Although the “predetermined display” described in the first example of the timer effect does not indicate the passage of time, it may be a specific mode when a predetermined time has passed. For example, as the predetermined operation, an operation process in which an insect becomes a pupa from a larva to become an adult (a specific mode) may be executed corresponding to the passage of time.

  (3) The "motion-related effect (operation effect)" described in the first example of the timer effect is an effect that is executed according to when the player operates, and as shown in FIGS. 40(C) to (E). For example, the effect is controlled such that the third effect having a longer timer period has a higher rate (frequency) of performing the operation effect than the first effect having a shorter timer period. Increasing the rate (frequency) at which the action corresponding effect is executed may be realized by setting the frequency at which the operation promotion display shown in FIG. 39 or the like is executed to be high. In addition, the action-based effect that increases the ratio (frequency) is automatically action-enabled when the action detection valid period elapses, even if the actual action of the player is not detected after executing the operation promotion display. May be included.

  (4) In the operation effect display area 9095 shown in FIG. 39, an image that is a specific image may be displayed during the operation effective period when the operation effect is executed. In that case, it is preferable that the display of the operation valid period should not be mistaken for the timer display. For example, the display of the operation valid period may show the operation valid period by increasing or decreasing the gauge on the meter display instead of a numerical value, and show the operation valid period by blinking the button image or the stick image during the operation valid period. You may.

  (5) As shown in FIG. 41, an image displayed in response to an operation detection in a plurality of operation effects may be displayed as if it is fixed to one type or may be selected from a plurality of types. An example in which what is displayed is mixed is shown. However, not limited to this, the image displayed in response to operation detection in a plurality of operation effects may be displayed so as to be selected from a plurality of types for all operation effects, and all operations The effect may be displayed so as to be fixed to one type.

  (6) As shown in FIG. 41, with respect to a plurality of operation effects, an example in which effects of the same type are executed in a predetermined order even if the expectation of a big hit is different is shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for a plurality of operation effects, the types of effects to be executed may be different according to the degree of expectation of a big hit. For example, a rare effect (premier effect) may be performed as the expectation of a big hit increases.

  (7) As shown in FIG. 41, an example is shown in which different types of effects are executed for a plurality of operation effects. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and one type of effect according to a predetermined story may be divided into a plurality of times to be executed, and an effect in which the story progresses may be executed for each operation effect.

  (8) As shown in FIG. 38, an example is shown in which a plurality of operation effects are executed at regular intervals. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be executed at irregular intervals. Further, the execution intervals of the plurality of operation effects may be randomly selected by lottery.

  (9) For the above-described first effect having the shortest effect period, it may be possible to execute the operation effect a plurality of times. In that case, in the first effect to the third effect, an operation effect may be executed at a time interval shorter than that of an effect having a long effect period (for example, in the third effect). (For the 10 second interval, the first effect is the 3 second interval etc.).

  (10) As shown in FIG. 38C, the operation effect execution interval when the timer is displayed is one type (10 seconds), but the invention is not limited to this. A plurality of types of effect execution intervals (for example, 5 seconds, 10 seconds, and 15 seconds) may be provided, and the operation effect may be executed at an execution interval selected by lottery from a plurality of types.

  (11) As the action-responsive effect, at least one of an effect that suggests the degree of expectation that is advantageous for the player and an effect that suggests which of a plurality of types of predetermined effects will be executed are executed. In the example, the effect displayed when the timer display becomes “0” may be suggested as the effect that suggests which one of the plurality of types of predetermined effects will be executed. Other information, such as the type of super reach to be executed, may be suggested, regardless of the effect executed when the value becomes "0".

  (12) As the action-responsive effect, at least one of an effect that suggests the degree of expectation that is advantageous for the player and an effect that suggests which of a plurality of types of predetermined effects will be executed are executed. In one example, one of the suggestions may be given each time the operation of the operating device is detected, and at the start of the variable display, the suggestion control microcomputer 90100 determines which of the suggestions should be made according to the progress of the presentation. May be selected and determined by lottery, and the suggested effect may be executed along with the selection and determination.

  (13) As shown in FIG. 41, the execution order pattern of a plurality of operation effects is fixedly fixed in advance (the operation order of plural kinds of operation means is regularly determined so as to alternate). Alternatively, the operation order of a plurality of types of operation means may be irregularly set), or the execution order may be randomly determined by lottery at the start of variable display. Good.

  (14) In the above-mentioned operation effect, a push sensor capable of detecting the operation of the operation means operable by the player such as the push button 90120 and the stick controller 90122 as the detection means capable of detecting the operation (action) of the player. The detection means such as 90124 and the tilt direction sensor unit 90123 are shown as an example. However, the detection means capable of detecting the movement of the player is not limited to this, and is not a means for detecting the operation of the operation means, but directly detects the movement of the player such as an infrared sensor and a motion sensor. Detectable detecting means may be used.

  (15) With regard to the above-mentioned operation effects, for example, an example in which the operation effects can be executed in an effect having a short effect period such as the first effect has been shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in an effect such as the first effect in which the effect period is short, the operation effect may not be executed even once. Such a control example is also one control example in which an operation effect can be executed at a higher rate (frequency) in an effect having a long effect period such as the third effect, as compared with an effect having a short effect period such as the first effect. Included as.

  (16) The area effect may be executed only in one of the first area 9091 and the second area 9092. In such a case, when it is determined that the area effect is to be executed in one of the areas, the area effect may be restricted not to be executed in the other area.

  (17) In the above-described embodiment, the case has been described in which the execution of the timer effect is restricted in the second area 9092 when the timer effect (gase effect) is executed in the first area 9091. However, the timer effect may be simultaneously executed in both the first area 9091 and the second area 9092. In such a case, the numerical value of the timer display 9094 displayed in the first area 9091 and the numerical value of the timer display 9094 displayed in the second area 9092 may be updated at the same time. The numerical values at that time may be the same or different in one area and the other area. Alternatively, after the countdown of the numerical value in one area is completed, the countdown of the numerical value in the other area may be started.

  (18) In the above-described embodiment, the timer effect may be executed in the first area 9091 and the second area 9092. Then, when the numerical values of the timer display 9094 in the first area 9091 and the second area 9092 simultaneously become values indicating 0 seconds, a predetermined effect may be executed. In such a case, the jackpot value expectation may be set to be higher when the timer effect is executed in both areas than when the timer effect is executed in only one area.

  (19) The timing at which the area effect is executed may be a timing other than when the fluctuation starts or before the start of the reach. For example, the timing may be executed when the reach is established or a predetermined timing during the reach, the timing when the maximum variation display of the pseudo-relation is started, the start timing of the SP reach, the timing when the prefetch effect is executed, or the like. . Further, the jackpot expectation may be changed depending on the timing of execution. Further, it may be executed at two or more timings out of a plurality of timings.

  (20) In the above-described embodiment, a timer may be displayed as a notice for holding consecutive calls during a big hit game. The pending reminders are so-called pending rerun chan (the so-called pending rerun ch Big hit game state occurs continuously) means to announce that it has occurred. For example, when there is such a hold storage, the timer effect is started at a predetermined timing before the end of the big hit, and the variable display of the hold storage that becomes the big hit is started when the value of the timer becomes 0. You can do it like this.

  (21) In the above-described embodiment, the timer effect may be executed during the big hit round. In such a case, for example, the suspension consecutive notice may be executed at the timing when the value of the timer becomes 0, the confirmation change notification indicating that the state is the confirmation change state may be executed, or the round continues. A round continuation notification indicating whether or not to perform may be executed.

  (22) The effects executed in the special effect and the timer effect may be determined at the same time, or the effects executed in the special effect and the timer effect may be determined separately. Further, the frame color may be determined when determining the effect executed in the special effect, and the display color of the timer may be determined when determining the effect executed in the timer effect.

  (23) In the above-described embodiment, the content of the pending storage data is determined (look-ahead) before the variable display performed according to the pending storage is started, and the content is displayed before the variable display is started. Alternatively, a region effect may be executed as a pre-reading effect for notifying the pending storage data. In such a case, "preparing" or the like may be displayed in the area in which the area effect is executed to indicate to the player that the area effect is executed.

  (24) In the above-described embodiment, the timer effect may be executed a plurality of times when the timer effect is executed. In such a case, the number of times the timer effect is executed in the future may be indicated. For example, when “×2” is displayed, it may indicate that the timer effect is executed twice. The number of times the timer effect is executed may be indicated by displaying a plurality of timer images.

  (25) In the above-described embodiment, when the timer effect is executed, “preparing” is displayed and the display period of “preparing” is changed, so that the subtraction time of the timer may be one pattern. Specifically, "preparing" is displayed during the variable display, and the timer display subsequently displayed may be displayed as the timer display 9094 for 5 seconds regardless of the variation pattern. . In this way, the subtraction time of the actual timer can be set to one pattern, which facilitates the design of the effect and reduces the amount of data used for the effect.

  (26) In the above-described embodiment, with respect to the effect executed in the second area 9092, the jackpot expectation degree is set to be different when the period display is performed and when the specific display other than the period display is performed. Good. For example, when the period display is executed, the jackpot expectation may be higher than when the specific display is executed, or when the specific display is executed, the period display is executed. The big hit expectation degree may be higher than in the case.

  (27) In the above-described embodiment, the case where the frame of the second area 9092 is always displayed on the screen of the effect display device 9 is shown. However, the frame of the second area 9092 may be displayed only at the timing when the area effect is executed. Further, the special effect may be executed for the second area 9092.

  (28) In the above-described embodiment, the timer display 9094 in which the digital display counts down with time is described as the period display displayed in the timer effect. However, in the timer display 9094, the number may be counted up with time, and the effect may be executed when a predetermined time is reached. Also, instead of displaying numerically as a period display showing the passage of time, one displaying an hourglass image showing the passage of time (one showing the time by the remaining sand of the hourglass) or a gauge image showing the passage of time Any effect may be used as long as it is information that can be used to display (indicating time by increasing or decreasing the gauge) and information that can suggest the end timing of a predetermined period is changed with the passage of time. .

  (29) In the above-described embodiment, the structure of the period display means for indicating the elapsed period information is provided by updating the period display. Further, there is provided a configuration of a predetermined effect execution unit capable of executing a predetermined effect when the period display updated by the period display unit is in a predetermined mode. However, in the configuration of the period display means, the period display may be simply displayed without being updated. Specifically, an image in which the squib of the bomb is ignited may be displayed as a display mode indicating the period display. Such an image may be any image as long as it can be seen that the period is displayed due to the ignition of the bomb squib, but the squib itself is not shortened. Then, the image in which the bomb detonator as a period display is ignited may be displayed for a predetermined period of time and then exploded, and some effect may be executed.

  (30) In the above-described embodiment, the predetermined effect executed when the timer display becomes 0 may be any effect. For example, as a predetermined effect, the reach pattern is stopped, the pseudo continuous pattern when executing the pseudo continuous effect is stopped, a notice that a big hit is confirmed (a big hit confirmation sound, a premium notice, etc.), a predetermined supermarket It may be possible to execute the one that develops to reach or the one in which an accessory works. In such a case, any effect selected from a plurality of kinds of effects may be executed at the timing when the timer display becomes 0. For example, when the one-shot notification (big hit confirmation notice) is executed at the timing of stopping the pseudo-relational pattern, the player can be surprised and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

  (31) In the above-described embodiment, when the area effect is executed in both the first area 9091 and the second area 9092, the timer effect is executed in one area and the value becomes 0. The timer effect may be started in the other area.

  (32) In the above-described embodiment, a pachinko machine is used as an example of a game machine, but various settings shown in the above-described embodiment are set by a player by inserting a medal and setting a predetermined bet number. A plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever, and when the symbols on the display means are stopped according to the operation of the stop button by the player, when the combination of the stopped symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols, a predetermined number It is also possible to apply to the slot machine (slot machine) in which the medals are paid out to the player. Specifically, the area effect may be executed on a display device such as an effect display device provided in the slot machine.

  (33) In the above-described embodiment, the jackpot gaming state has been described as a typical example as an advantageous state advantageous to the player. However, not limited to this, the advantageous state advantageous to the player may include a high probability state (probability change state), a time saving state, and another advantageous state such as a high base state.

  (34) The above-described embodiment can be applied to a device such as a game machine that simulates the operation of the pachinko gaming machine 901. The programs and data for realizing the above-described embodiments are not limited to the form distributed and provided to a computer device or the like by a removable recording medium, and a storage device included in the computer device or the like in advance. It may be distributed by pre-installed in. Further, the program and data for implementing the present invention may be distributed by being downloaded from another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter. The game embodiment can be executed not only by mounting a removable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. Alternatively, the hardware resources of other devices may be directly used on the network connected via a communication line. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

  (35) As the present embodiment, the gaming machine that pays out the game medium to the player's hand in accordance with the occurrence of the prize has been described. However, the game medium is enclosed and the game medium is distributed to the player in accordance with the occurrence of the prize. An enclosed game machine that adds game points (scores) without paying it out may be adopted. The enclosed game machine has a circulation path that circulates a plurality of balls, which is an example of a game medium, inside the game machine, and is provided with a storage unit that stores the game points. The game points are added to the storage unit, the game points are subtracted from the storage unit according to the ball firing operation, and the game points are added to the storage unit according to the occurrence of a prize.

  (36) In the above-described embodiment, a case has been described in which, for example, a plurality of types of special symbols or effect symbols “1” to “9” are variably displayed and the display result is derived and displayed. It is not limited to the mode. For example, the symbols that are variably displayed and the symbols that are derived and displayed do not necessarily have to be the same, and symbols that are different from the symbols that are variably displayed may be derived and displayed. Further, it is not always necessary to variably display a plurality of types of symbols, and variable display may be performed using only one type of symbol. In this case, for example, the variable display may be performed by alternately lighting and blinking the one type of symbol display. And, even in this case, one kind of symbol used for the variable display may be derived and displayed at the end, or a symbol different from the one kind of symbol may be finally derived and displayed. It may be one.

  (37) In the above-described embodiment, the "ratio (ratio, probability)" has been described with a specific example of a predetermined value exceeding 0%. However, the “ratio (ratio, probability)” may be 0%. For example, in the case where "the occurrence ratio of one is higher than the occurrence ratio of the other" by comparing the occurrence ratio of the predetermined game state 1 with the occurrence ratio of the other game state 2 in the predetermined game period, It also includes the case where the rate of occurrence of one game state is 0%.

  (38) In the above-described embodiment, after the variation display result when the display result of the variation display is determined to be the probability variation big hit is derived and displayed, and after the jackpot game state ends, the condition is changed to the probability variation state unconditionally. An example of controlled stochastic state control is given. However, not limited to this, when the detection means detects that the game ball has passed a specific area provided in the special winning opening of the special variable winning ball device 7, 9020, the probability changing state is controlled, the probability changing The determination device type probable variation state control may be executed.

  (39) It should be considered that the embodiments disclosed this time are exemplifications in all points and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown not by the above description but by the claims, and is intended to include meanings equivalent to the claims and all modifications within the scope.

  INDUSTRIAL APPLICABILITY The present invention is suitably applied to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine in which a player can play a predetermined game.

  1 pachinko gaming machine, 9 performance display device, 100 performance control microcomputer, 560 game control microcomputer, 901 pachinko game machine, 9096 third area, 9097 timer frame, 90100 performance control microcomputer, 90123 tilt direction sensor unit , 90124 push sensor, 9096 third area, 9097 timer frame, 90100 effect control microcomputer, 90123 tilt direction sensor unit, 90124 push sensor

Claims (1)

A gaming machine capable of performing variable display of identification information and controlling in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
Equipped with a variable display means capable of performing variable display of identification information,
The identification information includes first information and second information,
The display pattern of the identification information, a first display pattern for displaying the first information without displaying the second information, a second display pattern for displaying the first information and the second information, is provided ,
The variable display means performs the variable display by the first display pattern after the identification information starts changing in a predetermined direction, and stops the variable display by the second display pattern,
The display mode is different between the first information when displayed in the first display pattern and the first information when displayed in the second display pattern,
The variable display means,
In the special reach that develops after a lapse of a predetermined time after reaching the reach state, the first information is reduced and displayed, and the first information is reduced and displayed according to the effect sound output during the special reach. Display the information by performing a specific action,
When the variable display of the identification information is stopped, the first information is enlarged and then displayed, and then the first information is reduced and displayed,
When the variable display of the identification information is stopped, the second information is displayed so as to appear from the rear of the first information displayed in an enlarged manner,
further,
A motion detecting means capable of detecting a motion by a player,
A predetermined display means for performing a predetermined operation in which the predetermined display performs a predetermined operation, and
When the predetermined display is in the specific mode, a specific effect execution unit capable of executing any one of a plurality of specific effects,
Based on the detection result of said movement detecting means, and an operation corresponding representation section capable of executing operations corresponding effect corresponding to the operation of the player,
The predetermined display means may include a first display in which the predetermined display is in the specific mode when a first period has elapsed, or the predetermined display in which the predetermined display has the specific period when a second period longer than the first period has elapsed. It is possible to display a second display that is a mode,
The gaming machine further comprising effect control means for controlling the effect such that the rate at which the action corresponding effect is executed is higher in the second period than in the first period.